bnp-c3015.pdf
TRANSCRIPT
CNC
SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTION MANUAL
BNP-C3015A(ENG)
AC SPINDLEMDS-B-SPT SeriesMDS-C1-SPT Series
i
Introduction Thank you for selecting the Mitsubishi spindle drive unit. This instruction manual describes the handling and caution points for using this AC spindle. Incorrect handling may lead to unforeseen accidents, so always read this instruction manual thoroughly to ensure correct usage. Make sure that this instruction manual is delivered to the end user. Always store this manual in a safe place. All specifications for the MDS-B/C1-SPT Series are described in this manual. However, each CNC may not be provided with all specifications, so refer to the specifications for the CNC on hand before starting use.
Notes on Reading This Manual
(1) This is the MDS-B/C1-SPT Series Specifications Manual corresponding to the Toshiba Machine CNC "TOSNUC 888.2".
(2) Since the description of this specification manual deals with the spindle system in general, for the specifications of individual machine tools, refer to the manuals issued by the respective machine manufacturers.
The "restrictions" and "available functions" described in the manuals issued by the machine manufacturers have precedence to those in this manual.
(3) This manual describes as many special operations as possible, but it should be kept in mind that items not mentioned in this manual cannot be performed.
Precautions for safety Please read this manual and auxiliary documents before starting installation, operation, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct usage. Thoroughly understand the device, safety information and precautions before starting operation.
The safety precautions in this instruction manual are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
WARNING Incorrect handling could lead to a hazardous situation and result in fatalities or serious injuries.
CAUTION When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken leading to medium or minor injuries, or physical damage.
Note that some items described as CAUTION may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any case, important information that must be observed is described.
ii
1) In this manual, the following items are generically called the "spindle amplifier". • Spindle drive unit • Power supply unit
Changes to terminal names
The terminal names have been changed in two stages as shown below.
Before March 1995
Between April 1995 and March 1996 After April 1996
R R/L1 L1 S S/L2 L2 T T/L3 L3 P L+/P L+ N L-/N L- Ro L11/Ro L11 So L21/So L21
Term
inal
nam
e
G G/
iii
For Safety Use 1. Electric shock prevention
WARNING
Do not open the spindle amplifier's front cover or the spindle motor's terminal box cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks.
Do not turn the power ON with the spindle amplifier's front cover or spindle motor's terminal box cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged sections will be exposed, and could result in electric shocks.
Do not remove the front cover even when the power is OFF except for wiring work or periodic inspections. The spindle amplifier is charged and could result in electric shocks.
Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the power OFF and LED on spindle amplifier turning OFF before starting wiring or inspections. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
Ground the spindle motor and spindle amplifier with Class 3 or higher grounding.
Wiring, maintenance, and inspection work must be done by a qualified technician.
Wire the spindle motor and spindle amplifier after installation. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks.
Do not operate the spindle amplifier switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks..
Do not damage, apply forcible stress, place heavy items on the cables or get them caught. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
2. Fire prevention
CAUTION
Install the spindle motor, spindle amplifier, and regenerative resistor on non-combustible material. Direct installation on combustible material or near combustible materials could lead to fires.
Shut off the power on the spindle amplifier's power side, if a fault occurs in the spindle amplifier. Fires could be caused if a large current continues to flow.
When using the regenerative resistor, shut off the power with an error signal. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and cause a fire due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc.
3. Injury prevention
CAUTION
Do not apply a voltage on each terminal other than that indicated in the Specification Manual or Instruction Manual. Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc.
Do not mistake the terminal connections. Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc.
Do not mistake the DC voltage polarity (+, -). Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc.
The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns.
iv
4. Various precautions Observe the following precautions. Incorrect handling of the unit could lead to faults, injuries and electric shocks, etc. (1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
Correctly transport the product according to its mass. Use the spindle motor's suspension bolts only to transport the spindle motor. Do not transport the spindle motor when it is installed on the machine. Do not stack the spindle motors and spindle amplifiers above the indicated limit. Do not hold the cables, shaft or detector when transporting the spindle motor. Do not transport the spindle amplifier by holding the connected wires or cables.
Do not hold the front cover, side covers or fins when transporting the spindle amplifier. The amplifier could drop or be damaged.
Follow the instruction manual, and install the spindle motor and spindle amplifier at a place which can withstand the mass.
Do not get on the spindle motor or spindle amplifier. Do not place heavy objects on the spindle motor or spindle amplifier. Always observe the indicated spindle motor and spindle amplifier installation direction.
Provide the specified distance between the spindle amplifier and inner surface of the control panel and between other devices.
Do not install or operate a spindle motor or spindle amplifier that is damaged or missing parts.
Provide the specified distance between the spindle motor cooling fan's intake/outtake ports and other devices and between other machines' metal parts.
Do not allow conductive matters such as screws or metal pieces, or combustible matters such as oil enter the spindle motor or spindle amplifier.
The spindle motor and spindle amplifier are precision devices. Do not drop them or apply strong impacts.
Store and use the spindle motor and spindle amplifier within the following environmental conditions.
Conditions
Environment Spindle amplifier Spindle motor
Ambient temperature 0°C to +55°C (with no freezing) 0°C to +40°C (with no freezing)
Ambient humidity To follow separate specifications 80%RH or less (with no dew condensation)
Storage temperature To follow separate specifications -15°C to +70°C
Storage humidity To follow separate specifications 90% RH or less (with no dew condensation)
Atmosphere Indoors (Where unit is not subject to direct sunlight) With no corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil mist or dust
Altitude 1000m or less above sea level Vibration To follow separate specifications
v
CAUTION Securely fix the spindle motor onto the machine. Insufficient fixing may result in dislocation during operation.
Always provide a cover, etc., on the shaft so that the spindle motor's rotating sections cannot be touched while the spindle motor is rotating.
When coupling the spindle motor's shaft end to the machine's shaft, pulley or gears, etc., do not apply an impact on the spindle motor with a hammer, etc. Failure to observe this could result in bearing damage or detector faults.
Do not apply a load exceeding the tolerable load onto the spindle motor shaft. Failure to observe this could result in bearing damage or shaft breakage.
Consult with the Service Center or Service Station when storing the spindle motor or spindle amplifier for a long time.
(2) Wiring
CAUTION Correctly and securely perform the wiring. Failure to do so could lead to runaway of the spindle motor.
Do not install a condensing capacitor, surge absorber or radio noise filter on the output side of the spindle amplifier.
Correctly connect the output side (terminals U, V, W). Failure to do so could lead to abnormal operation of the spindle motor.
Do not directly connect a commercial power supply to the spindle motor. Doing so could lead to faults.
When using an inductive load such as a relay on the control output signal, always connect a diode in parallel to the load as a measure against noise.
When using a capacitance load such as a lamp for the control output signal, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load as a measure against noise.
Do not mistake the polarity of the noise (surge) absorption diode installed on the DC relay for the control output signal. The faulty signal will not be output and the spindle amplifier could fail.
Do not connect or disconnect the cables connected to each connector or terminal while the power is ON.
Securely tighten the cable connector fixing screw or fixing mechanism. Insufficient fixing could result in dislocation while the power is ON.
If use of a shielded cable is indicated in the connection diagram for the signal wires connected to the spindle amplifier, always use a shielded cable, and always connect the shield to the connector clamp.
Always separate the signal wires connected to the spindle motor and spindle amplifier from the drive wires and power wires.
Always use wires and cables having a wire diameter, heat resistance and flexibility compatible with the system.
Fix part of the cable connected to each spindle amplifier connector to part of the control panel so that connector is not pulled forward or vertically.
Do not relay the speed detector or position detector cables. Failure to observe this could result in vibration, noise or positional deviation.
Spindle amplifier
VIN(24VDC)
Control output signal
vi
(3) Trial operation and adjustment
WARNING When adjusting the drive unit with a personal computer, some parameters will be validated as soon as they are changed. Take special care when making adjustments while rotating the spindle, and take care not to approach body parts near the spindle. Failure to observe this could result in personal injury.
When monitoring the state of the spindle or spindle motor with a personal computer, if the spindle motor's maximum speed is set to 33000r/min or more or if parameter SP257 is set to "0002", the spindle motor speed displayed on the personal computer will be half of the actual speed. Failure to note this could result in spindle damage.
CAUTION Check each parameter before starting operation. Unpredictable movements could result depending on the machine.
Do not make remarkable adjustments and changes as the operation could become unstable.
(4) Usage methods
CAUTION Install an external emergency stop circuit so that the operation can be stopped and power shut off immediately.
Turn the power OFF immediately if any smoke, abnormal noise or odors are generated from the spindle motor or spindle amplifier.
Only a qualified technician may disassemble or repair this product.
Never make modifications.
Connect a noise filter, etc., on the spindle amplifier power lead-in wire to reduce the effect of electromagnetic disturbances. Electronic devices used near the spindle amplifier could be affected by the electromagnetic disturbances.
Use the spindle motor, spindle amplifier and regenerative resistor in the designated combination. Failure to observe this could result in fires or faults.
After changing the parameters, maintenance or inspection, always carry out a trial operation before starting actual operation.
Do not place hands or feet near the spindle during rotation.
Use the power (input voltage, input frequency, tolerable sudden power failure time) under the power specification conditions given in the individual Specifications.
Install a surge killer on coils for solenoid valves and contactors, etc., used near the spindle amplifier to prevent noise. Failure to do so could result in malfunctions.
(5) Troubleshooting
CAUTION If a hazardous situation could arise during a power failure or product fault, provide an external brake mechanism for holding purposes.
Turn the power OFF if an alarm occurs.
Never go near the machine after restoring the power after an instantaneous power failure, as the machine could start suddenly. (Design the machine so that personal safety can be ensured even if the machine starts suddenly.)
vii
(6) Maintenance, inspection and part replacement
CAUTION Back up the spindle amplifier parameters before starting maintenance or inspections.
The capacity of the electrolytic capacitor will drop due to deterioration. To prevent secondary damage due to failures, replacing this part every five years when used under a normal environment is recommended. Contact the Service Center or Service Station for replacement.
Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) on the spindle amplifier during inspections.
(7) Disposal
CAUTION Handle this product as general industrial waste. If heat radiating fins are exposed on the back of the spindle amplifier, a CFC substitute is in use. These models must not be handled as general industrial waste and must always be returned to the Service Center or Service Station.
Do not disassemble the spindle motor or spindle amplifier.
(8) General precautions
CAUTION To explain the details, drawings given in this manual, etc., may show the unit with the cover or safety partition removed. Always install the cover or partitions at their original position before turning the spindle motor or spindle amplifier power ON, and operate as indicated in the manual, etc.
viii
Compliance to European EC Directives 1. European EC Directives
The European EC Directives were issued to unify standards in the EU Community, and to ensure smooth distribution of products for which safety is ensured. In the EU Community, the attachment of a CE mark (CE marking) is mandatory to indicate that the basic safety conditions of the Machine directives (issued Jan. 1994), EMC Directives (issued Jan. 1996) and the Low-voltage Directives (issued Jan. 1997) are satisfied. The machines and devices in which the servo and spindle drive are assembled are a target for CE marking. The spindle drive does not function independently, and is a component designed to be used in combination with a machine or device. Thus, the spindle drive is not directly targeted by the Directives, but a CE mark must be attached to machines and devices in which it is assembled. "EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES", (BNP-B8582-45) which explains the servo amplifier installation and control panel manufacturing methods, etc., have been prepared for the MDS-B/C1 Series to facilitate CE marking of the machine and device in which this product is assembled, to realize compliance with low-voltage directive related standards, and realize compliance with EMC Directives. Contact Mitsubishi or your dealer for more information.
2. Cautions for EC Directive compliance Use the Low-voltage Directive compatible parts for the spindle drive and spindle motor. In addition to the items described in this instruction manual, observe the items described below. (1) Configuration
Reinforced isolating
transformer
No-fuse breaker
Control panel
Electromagnetic contactor
Servo/spindle drive
NFB MC
Motor (servo/spindle)
(2) Environment
Use the spindle drive within a Pollution Class 2 or less environment as stipulated in IEC664. Install the spindle drive in control panel having a structure (IP54) which does not permit the entry of water, oil, carbon or dust, etc.
(3) Power supply
(a) Use the spindle drive under the Overvoltage Category II conditions stipulated in IEC664. Install a reinforced isolating transformer complying with IEC or EN Standards at the power input section.
ix
(4) Grounding (a) To prevent electric shocks, always connect the spindle amplifier protective earth (PE)
terminal (terminal with mark) to the protective earth (PE) on the control panel. (Always ground even when using an earth leakage breaker.)
(b) When connecting the earthing wire to the protective earth (PE) terminal, do not tighten the wire terminals together. Always connect one wire to one terminal.
PE terminal PE terminal
(5) Wiring
(a) Always use crimp terminals with insulation tubes so that the wires connected to the spindle amplifier terminal block do not contact the neighboring terminals.
(6) Peripheral devices and options (a) Use no-fuse breakers and magnetic contacts which comply with EN/IEC Standards. (b) Select the wire size according to EN60204. (Refer to section (8.3 7).)
(7) Miscellaneous
Refer to "EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES" for methods on complying with the EMC Directives.
Crimp terminal
Insulation tube
Wire
x
CONTENTS
I. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section 1. Outline ................................................................................................................................. I-1
1.1 Features ...................................................................................................................... I-1 1.2 Precautions for use...................................................................................................... I-2
2. System Configuration .......................................................................................................... I-3 3. Unit Installation.................................................................................................................... I-7 4. Connection of Each Unit...................................................................................................... I-9
4.1 Layout of each unit .................................................................................................... I-10 4.2 Link bar specifications ............................................................................................... I-10 4.3 Precautions for installing multiple power supply units ............................................... I-12 4.4 Precautions when installing multiple spindle drive units to one power supply unit.... I-13
5. Connector and Cable Specifications ................................................................................. I-14 5.1 Half pitch connector and cable connection system ................................................... I-14 5.2 Cable details.............................................................................................................. I-15
5.2.1 SH21 cable (Semi-ordered part) [For B/C1-CV Û B/C1-SPT connection]........... I-15 5.2.2 Spindle control circuit cable list ........................................................................... I-16 5.2.3 Cable assembly procedure ................................................................................. I-21
6. Outline Drawing................................................................................................................. I-25 6.1 List of outlines............................................................................................................ I-25 6.2 Power supply unit ...................................................................................................... I-26 6.3 Spindle drive unit ....................................................................................................... I-27 6.4 AC reactor ................................................................................................................. I-28 6.5 Contactor ................................................................................................................... I-29 6.6 NFB ........................................................................................................................... I-29
7. Heating Value.................................................................................................................... I-30 8. Selection of Capacity......................................................................................................... I-31
8.1 Selection of the power supply unit (MDS-B/C1-CV) .................................................. I-31 8.2 Selection of the power supply capacity ..................................................................... I-31 8.3 Selection of wire size................................................................................................. I-32 8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB.............................................................. I-35
II. MDS-B/C1-CV Power Regeneration Type Power Supply Section 1. Power Supply Unit.............................................................................................................. II-1
1.1 Model configuration .................................................................................................... II-1 1.2 List of specifications ................................................................................................... II-2 1.3 Hardware and parameter setting ................................................................................ II-3 1.4 Status display ............................................................................................................. II-4
1.4.1 7-segment LED display ........................................................................................ II-4 1.4.2 Charge lamp......................................................................................................... II-4
1.5 List of alarms and warnings........................................................................................ II-5 1.6 Explanation of connectors and terminal block ............................................................ II-7 1.7 Functions added with MDS-B Series
(Power supply external emergency stop function)...................................................... II-8 1.8 Main circuit connection ............................................................................................. II-10
xi
III. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit System Section 1. Model, Configuration and Connection ............................................................................... III-1
1.1 Model configuration ................................................................................................... III-1 1.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................. III-2
1.2.1 Basic configuration (No additional specifications) ............................................... III-2 1.2.2 With orientation function...................................................................................... III-2
1.3 Device-to-device connections.................................................................................... III-4 2. Specifications .................................................................................................................... III-5
2.1 AC spindle motor and controller specifications.......................................................... III-5 2.2 Output characteristics................................................................................................ III-9 2.3 Outline dimension drawings .................................................................................... III-11
2.3.1 Motor ................................................................................................................. III-11 3. Status Display and Parameter Settings........................................................................... III-16
3.1 Status display with 7-segment LED......................................................................... III-17 3.2 Spindle parameters ................................................................................................. III-18 3.3 Spindle specification parameters screen................................................................. III-39 3.4 Spindle monitor screen............................................................................................ III-40 3.5 Control input signals ................................................................................................ III-41 3.6 Control output signals.............................................................................................. III-43 3.7 Meter outputs........................................................................................................... III-46 3.8 Output interface....................................................................................................... III-48
4. Optional Specifications and Parts ................................................................................... III-49 4.1 Orientation specifications (optional) ........................................................................ III-49
4.1.1 1-point orientation using magnetic sensor ........................................................ III-49 4.1.2 4096-point orientation using encoder................................................................ III-57 4.1.3 4096-point orientation using motor built-in encoder .......................................... III-60 4.1.4 Operation of orientation..................................................................................... III-60
4.2 Synchronous tap function (option)........................................................................... III-63 4.2.1 Closed type synchronous tap............................................................................ III-63 4.2.2 Semi-closed type synchronous tap ................................................................... III-63 4.2.3 Operation of synchronous tap ........................................................................... III-63
4.3 C-axis control (optional)........................................................................................... III-64 4.3.1 When using encoder (OSE90K+1024 BKO-NC6336H01) ................................ III-64 4.3.2 When using built-in encoder (MBE90K) ............................................................ III-67 4.3.3 When using built-in encoder (MHE90K) ............................................................ III-67
4.4 Single parts (optionally supplied parts).................................................................... III-68 4.4.1 Power step-down transformer ........................................................................... III-68 4.4.2 Noise filter ......................................................................................................... III-70
4.5 Other optional specifications ................................................................................... III-72 4.6 Theoretical acceleration and deceleration times ..................................................... III-73
IV. Maintenance MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section 1. Starting up the System ......................................................................................................IV-1
1.1 Startup procedures ....................................................................................................IV-1 1.2 Status display with 7-segment LED...........................................................................IV-2
2. Adding and Replacing Units and Parts..............................................................................IV-3 2.1 Replacing the unit......................................................................................................IV-3 2.2 Unit fan ......................................................................................................................IV-6
3. Daily Maintenance.............................................................................................................IV-7 3.1 Maintenance tools .....................................................................................................IV-7 3.2 Periodic inspections...................................................................................................IV-7
4. Maintenance Parts ............................................................................................................IV-9 5. Selection of Leakage Breaker .........................................................................................IV-10 6. Noise Filter ......................................................................................................................IV-11
xii
V. Maintenance MDS-B-CVE/MDS-C1/CV Power Supply Section 1. Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................V-1
1.1 Status display .............................................................................................................V-1 1.2 Troubleshooting according to power supply alarm.....................................................V-3 1.3 Power supply warning ..............................................................................................V-12
VI. Maintenance MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section 1. Adjustment Procedures .....................................................................................................VI-1
1.1 Starting up .................................................................................................................VI-1 1.2 Confirming the speed loop.........................................................................................VI-1
1.2.2 Adjusting and confirming the motor (spindle) speed ...........................................VI-1 1.2.3 Adjusting the deceleration time ...........................................................................VI-2
1.3 Adjusting the orientation ............................................................................................VI-2 1.3.1 Operation ............................................................................................................VI-2 1.3.2 Operation sequence............................................................................................VI-2 1.3.3 Encoder orientation/motor built-in encoder orientation stop position ..................VI-3 1.3.4 Diagram of orientation parameter relation...........................................................VI-4 1.3.5 Preparation for motor built-in encoder orientation adjustment ............................VI-4 1.3.6 Preparation for encoder orientation adjustment ..................................................VI-5 1.3.7 Preparation for magnetic sensor orientation adjustment.....................................VI-6 1.3.8 Adjusting the orientation......................................................................................VI-7 1.3.9 Adjusting the servo rigidity ..................................................................................VI-7 1.3.10 Delay/advance control and PI control................................................................VI-8 1.3.11 Troubleshooting for orientation trouble .............................................................VI-8
1.4 Adjusting the synchronous tap ................................................................................VI-10 2. Troubleshooting...............................................................................................................VI-11
2.1 Introduction..............................................................................................................VI-11 2.2 Step 1 ......................................................................................................................VI-11 2.3 Step 2 ......................................................................................................................VI-12 2.4 List of alarms and warnings.....................................................................................VI-15 2.5 Approach per phenomenon.....................................................................................VI-16
2.5.1 Details when alarm or warning is displayed on the 7-segment display .............VI-16 2.5.2 Details when alarm or warning is not displayed on 7-segment unit ..................VI-25
2.6 Periodic inspections.................................................................................................VI-28 2.6.1 Inspecting the control unit .................................................................................VI-28 2.6.2 Inspecting the motor..........................................................................................VI-28
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor ......................................................................VI-29 3.1 Disassembling and assembling the SJ type AC spindle motor ...............................VI-29 3.2 Disassembling and assembling the SJ-N type AC spindle motor............................VI-37
4. Handling the Orientation Detector ...................................................................................VI-46 4.1 Magnetic sensor type 1-point orientation.................................................................VI-46
4.1.1 Operation of magnet and sensor.......................................................................VI-46 4.1.2 Sequences, etc. ................................................................................................VI-47
4.2 Encoder type 4096-point orientation........................................................................VI-47 4.2.1 Configuration.....................................................................................................VI-47 4.2.2 Sequences, etc. ................................................................................................VI-47
4.3 Motor built-in encoder type 4-96-point orientation ...................................................VI-47 4.3.1 Sequences, etc. ................................................................................................VI-47
xiii
Appendix 1 Parameter Setting List ..........................................................................................1 Appendix 2 Unit Conversion Table ..........................................................................................1 Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications ..................................1
1. Outline.................................................................................................................................1 2. List of units ..........................................................................................................................1 3. Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB............................................................1 4. Outline of units ....................................................................................................................2 5. Panel cut dimension drawing ..............................................................................................3 6. Detailed outline drawing......................................................................................................4 7. Heating value ......................................................................................................................7 8. Selection of power capacity ................................................................................................7 9. Selecting of wire size ..........................................................................................................7 10. Drive unit connection screw size.......................................................................................8 11. Connection of Each Unit ...................................................................................................8 12. Restrictions .....................................................................................................................10 13. Parameters .....................................................................................................................11 14. Precautions .....................................................................................................................11
I. MDS-B/C1-SPT
Spindle System Configuration Section
1. Outline
I - 1
1. Outline
1.1 Features (1) High-speed serial communication with CNC
A high-speed serial communication function, compatible with the Toshiba Machine CNC "TOSNUC 888.2" has been incorporated.
(2) Compact and lightweight The volume, installation area and mass have been drastically reduced with the incorporation of high density mounted electronic parts IPM (Intelligent Power Module) and the high performance heat dissipation fin.
(3) Standardization of dimensions Mounting in cabinets has been made easy by unifying the height and inner-panel depth dimensions of all power supply unit and spindle drive unit capacities.
(4) Low heat generation The amount of heat generated has been greatly reduced by incorporating the IPM.
(5) Separable units Separable converter sections and inverter sections allows the optimum unit matching the motor characteristics to be selected. Multiple inverters can be driven with one converter to handle multi-axis machines.
(6) High-speed and precision processing A high-speed CPU has been mounted to improve the cutting performance and accuracy.
(7) High-speed spindle orientation Smooth operations and minimum orientation times have been realized by using the high-speed orientation method which allows direct orientation from the maximum speed.
(8) Simple parameter input All parameters can be input from the personal computer allowing startup and adjustments to be completed in a short time.
(9) MDS-B/V1 Series features (a) European Safety Standard compliant This system is compatible with European Safety Standards (LVD Directives). (Refer to
"Compliance with European EC Directives" for details.) (Note that the target models in the B/C1 Series are limited to the CV (power regeneration
power supply) and SPT (spindle drive.) (b) Addition of power supply emergency stop input line When using the B/C1 Series, if the emergency stop hot line from the NC is disabled for any
reason, the external contactor can be directly cut off with from the power supply. (This function is validated with the rotary switch and connected drive's parameter settings.)
1. Outline
I - 2
1.2 Precautions for use
(1) The motor rated output is guaranteed when the power supply unit's input voltage is 200VAC or more. The rated output may not be achieved if the input voltage fluctuates and drops below this level.
(2) A higher harmonic chopper voltage, controlled by PWM, is applied on the motor causing a higher
harmonic leakage current to flow when the motor is running. A general-purpose earth leakage breaker could malfunction due to the effect of this higher
harmonic, so always use an earth leakage breaker for inverters. (3) The above higher harmonic leakage current also flows to the grounding wire between the motor
and drive unit. If this grounding wire is placed near the NC's CRT screen, the CRT screen could malfunction due to the effect of the leakage current's magnetic field. Keep the grounding wire as far away from the CRT screen as possible.
(4) Noise may occur in AM radio broadcasts due to the electromagnetic wave noise generated from the
motor and drive unit. Separate radios and the motor and drive unit as far as possible. A filter for radio noise measures is available as an option, so use one if necessary. (5) When adjusting the drive unit with a personal computer, some parameters will be validated as soon
as they are changed. Take special care when making adjustments while rotating the spindle, and take care not to approach body parts near the spindle. Failure to observe this could result in machine damage or personal injury.
(6) Do not relay the speed detector or position detector cables. Doing so could result malfunctions
caused by the motor power cable or noise from other devices. Any relays made are the responsibility of the user, and measures against noise must be provided.
2. System Configuration
I - 3
2. System Configuration
WARNING 1. Wiring and inspection work must be done by a qualified technician. 2. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the power OFF and LED on spindle amplifier turning
OFF before starting wiring or inspections. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.3. Wire the spindle motor and spindle amplifier after installation. Failure to observe this could
result in electric shocks. 4. Do not damage, apply forcible stress, place heavy items on the cables or get them caught.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION 1. Correctly and securely perform the wiring. Failure to do so could lead to runaway of the
spindle motor, or to injuries. 2. Do not mistake the names of the terminals for connecting the cables. Failure to observe this
could result in rupture or faults. 3. Do not mistake the DC voltage polarity (+, -). Failure to
observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc. 4. Do not mistake the polarity of the noise (surge) absorption
diode installed on the DC relay for the control output signal. The faulty signal will not be output and the spindle amplifier could fail.
5. Electronic devices used near the spindle amplifier could be affected by the electromagnetic disturbances. Connect a noise filter, etc., on the power lead-in wire to reduce the effect of electromagnetic disturbances. (Refer to III. Spindle drive unit section 4.4.2.)
6. Do not use a phase-advancing capacitor, surge killer or noise filter on the spindle motor's power wire.
7. If a spindle motor or spindle amplifier fails, cut off the power with the fault output. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and ignite due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc.
8. Never modify the spindle motor or spindle amplifier. 9. Precautions for using MDS-B Series
1) The rush sequence of the power supply unit's MDS-B-CV-370 differs from other power supplies, so always install an external contactor. Do not share the contactor with other power supplies.
Spindle amplifier
VIN
(24VDC)
Control output signal
2. System Configuration
I - 4
(1) Basic system configuration (Note 1) Always install the spindle drive unit next to the power supply unit. (Note 2) Wire the AC reactor to the front (NF side) of the contactor. (Note 3) Whether or not to install a contactor can be selected only for the MDS-C1-CV-300 and
smaller capacities. For safety purposes, use the state with no contactor only when the system configuration
ensures that problems can be avoided when trouble occurs. Set the rotary switch on the power supply unit according to whether the contactor is installed. Contactor installed : Rotary switch setting = 0 Contactor not installed : Rotary switch setting = 1 (Note 4) Always install the AC reactor. (The reactor is supplied from Mitsubishi.) (Note 5) Always install a surge killer on the contactor.
NC (PC)
CN1A
CN4
CN4
Spindle drive unit
Power supply unit
MDS-B/C1-SPTCN56
MDS-B/C1-CV
U V W L1 L2 L3
L+, L- L11, L21 Control power RS
Spindle motor
Con-tactor
NFB 1
NFB 2
200VAC IN
Spindle motor fan power supply ST
Power supply RST
Link bar
MC1
B-AL
AC reactor
Spindle motor
ENC
Magnetic sensor
78
2. System Configuration
I - 5
(2) List of units
(a) MDS-B Series Power supply unit ..... DC power supply to drive unit/regenerative control Dimensions Correspondence to drive unit capacity (MDS-B-SPT)
No. Model Capa- city (kW)
Mass (kg) H×W×D (mm) Type 04 075 15 22 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
1 B-CVE-37 3.7 5.0 380×60×300 2 B-CVE-55 5.5 5.0 380×60×300 3 B-CVE-75 7.5 5.0 380×60×300
A1
4 B-CVE-110 11.0 8.5 380×90×300 B1 5 B-CVE-150 15.0 10.5 380×120×300 6 B-CVE-185 18.5 10.5 380×120×300
C1
7 B-CVE-220 22.0 12.5 380×150×300 8 B-CVE-260 26.0 12.5 380×150×300 9 B-CVE-300 30.0 12.5 380×150×300
10 B-CVE-370 37.0 12.5 380×150×300
D1
(b) MDS-C1 Series Power supply unit ..... DC power supply to drive unit/regenerative control Dimensions Correspondence to drive unit capacity (MDS-B-SPT)
No. Model Capa- city (kW)
Mass (kg) H×W×D (mm) Type 04 075 15 22 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
1 C1-CV-37 3.7 5.0 380×60×200 2 C1-CV-55 5.5 5.0 380×60×200 3 C1-CV-75 7.5 5.0 380×60×200
A2
4 C1-CV-110 11.0 8.5 380×90×255 B2 5 C1-CV-150 15.0 10.5 380×120×255 6 C1-CV-185 18.5 10.5 380×120×255
C2
7 C1-CV-220 22.0 12.5 380×150×255 8 C1-CV-260 26.0 12.5 380×150×255 9 C1-CV-300 30.0 12.5 380×150×255
10 C1-CV-370 37.0 12.5 380×150×255
D2
(Note 1) The power supply unit and spindle drive unit combination may differ from the above
combinations. The power supply capacity is determined by the motor output, and the spindle drive unit
capacity is determined by the motor characteristics. (Note 2) Refer to "Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications" for details on
the MDS-B-CVE-450 and SPT-370, 450 and 550.
2. System Configuration
I - 6
(3) List of unit dimensions
Outline type A1 B1 C1 D1
Outline drawing
(mm)
W: 60
(Fin section D: 120)
D: 300180
H: 380
The A0 type has no fin. (Depth: 180)
W: 90 D: 300
Fin section: 120
H: 380
W: 120 D: 300
Fin section: 120
H: 380
W: 150 D: 300
Fin section: 120
H: 380
Outline type A2 B2 C2 D2
Outline drawing
(mm)
W: 60
(Fin section D: 120)
D: 300180
H: 380
The A0 type has no fin. (Depth: 180)
W: 90 D: 300
Fin section: 120
H: 380
W: 120 D: 300
Fin section: 120
H: 380
W: 150 D: 300
Fin section: 120
H: 380
3. Unit Installation
I - 7
3. Unit Installation
CAUTION
1. Correctly transport the product according to its mass. Failure to observe this could result in injury.
2. Do not stack the product above the indicated limit. 3. Install the product on non-combustible material. Installation directly on or near combustible
materials could result in fires. 4. When installing, always observe this manual and install on a place which can withstand the
mass. 5. Do not get on the product, or place heavy objects on it. Failure to observe this could result in
injury. 6. Use the product within the designated environment conditions. 7. Do not allow conductive matters such as screws or metal pieces, or combustible matters such
as oil enter the spindle amplifier. 8. Do not block the spindle amplifier's intake/outtake ports. Failure to observe this could result in
faults. 9. The spindle amplifier is a precision device. Do not drop it or apply strong impacts. 10. Do not install or operate a spindle amplifier that is damaged or missing parts. 11. Consult with the Service Center or Service Station when storing the spindle amplifier for a
long time.
(1) Each unit is designed to be installed in a cabinet such as a power distribution box. Avoid installation
in direct sunlight, near heat generating objects or outdoors. (2) The inner working environment (temperature, humidity, vibration, atmosphere) of the cabinet must
be within the limits given in the "Specifications for each unit". The cabinet for the cutting machine must be a totally closed type cabinet.
(3) Make considerations so that inspections and replacement during maintenance is easy. The space required around each unit's panel is shown in the outline dimension drawings. (4) Each unit generates some heat, so leave a space on the top and bottom when installing other
equipment or parts. Refer to the outline drawing for the square hole dimensions. In this case, insert packing between
the unit and power distribution box. Refer to the following installation examples for installing each unit.
40
4040
Rear
Power distribution box
Front
160
40
Power distribution box
Cover
Outtake
Intake
Partition
Filter
Example 1. Leave space for air flow when the power distribution box is at the rear of the machine.
Example 2. When the outdoor air cooling section is to protrude from the power distribution box, make sure that cutting chips, etc., do not enter the outtake section.
3. Unit Installation
I - 8
CAUTION
1. Do not hold the front cover when transporting the spindle amplifier. The amplifier could drop and cause injury.
2. Always observe the installation direction. Failure to do so could result in faults. 3. Provide the specified distance between the spindle amplifier and inner surface of the control
panel and between other devices. Failure to do so could result in faults.
Note 1. When installing in a poor environment (factory with high levels of oil mist), install a filter at the
intake section of the partition showed with the dashed line in Example 2 above. Note 2. Make sure that cutting chips from the drill, etc., do not enter the spindle amplifier when
assembling the control panel. Note 3. Provide means so that oil, water and cutting chips, etc., do not enter the spindle amplifier from
the control panel clearances or the ceiling fan. Note 4. When using the product in a place with high levels of harmful gases or dust, protect the
spindle amplifier with air purging (feed in clean air from outside so that the pressure in the storage panel is higher than outside to prevent the entry of harmful gases or dust).
(5) Installation of cooling fan
Each unit (excluding types without fins) is individually provided with a cooling fan (FAN1 shown below). However, when using the totally closed type unit installation method and the box structure in which cutting oil and dust, etc., easily enters the unit's fan and fin section (a structure where the fan may stop easily due to the working environment), the user should add a fan at the FAN2 position shown on the right. Carry out forced cooling with the velocity set to 2m/sec or more. Also take the serviceability into consideration in this case.
FAN1 (mounted on unit as standard) FAN2 (Additionally installed by user) * Install a finger guard for
safety.
Inside box Outside box
Wind direction
Due to the structure, heat will tend to accumulate on the top of each unit. Thus, install a fan in the power distribution box to mix the heat at the top of each unit.
(Inside box) Wind direction
Spi
ndle
driv
e
Pow
er s
uppl
y
Front view of units
FAN3 (Additionally installed by user) Velocity 2m/sec or higher * Install a finger guard for safety.
4. Connection of Each Unit
I - 9
4. Connection of Each Unit CAUTION
1. Turn the spindle amplifier power OFF if the spindle amplifier fails. Fires could be caused if a large current continues to flow.
2. Cut off the power with the error signal. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and ignite due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc.
3. Do not relay the cables connected to CN5 and 6 on the spindle drive unit with a terminal block or connector, etc. Failure to observe this could result in malfunctions or faults.
5. Always connect the motor's ground to the terminal on the spindle drive unit with a grounding wire. Directly connect the grounding for each unit to the grounding terminal on each power distribution box. (Do not pass the grounding wire through each drive unit.) Failure to observe this could result in spindle amplifier malfunctions or faults.
6. Always connect the external contactor for MDS-B/V1-CV-370/450/550. Do not share this connector with other CVs as damage could occur.
Wire the power supply and main circuit as shown below. Always use a No fuse Breaker (NFB) on the power supply input wire. <Standard connection> The control circuit power is provided by applying the 3-phase power supply on R, S and T. After initializing for approx. one second, the machine ready input signal turns ON and enables operation. If this signal turns OFF during spindle motor operation, the base interception will be carried out, and the motor will coast (no load).
L21
V W
Wiring system diagram
NC (PC)
CN
S20
CN
1A
CN
1B
CN
9 C
N5
CN
6 C
N7
CN
8 C
N4
CN
4 C
N9
CN
6
(Magnetic sensor)
(Encoder)
(Spindle motor)
MDS-B/C1-SPT (Spindle drive)
U
MC
U VW
MC1
T 3ø S 200VAC R 200 to 230VAC 60Hz
(Contactor)
U V WL+
L-L11
A/BAL
(AC reactor)
L1 L2 L3
MDS-B/C1-CV (Power supply)
Note 1. Starting with production in April 1995, a grounding bar has been attached to each unit before shipment. Connect the grounding wire as shown below, and do not tighten the grounding wires together.
For B/C1-SPT For B/C1-CV
Note 2. If the unit may malfunction since devices (contactor, magnetic brakes, relay) that generate high levels of noise are installed near the power supply unit and drive unit, install a surge killer on the noise generating device, so as to suppress the noise.
4. Connection of Each Unit
I - 10
4.1 Layout of each unit
Layout the units according to the following reference as a principle.
(1) When installing one spindle drive
(2) When installing two spindle drives (a) When the total spindle drive output is 37kW or less
(b) When the total spindle drive output exceeds 37kW
(Note 1) Install each unit next to each other (vertical direction is not acceptable) with a 3cm or less clearance between each unit.
Note that this does not apply to the spindle drives (2) and power supply units (1) shown in (b) of section (2).
(Note 2) When using section (2) (b), install an ACL (A/B-AL) on each power supply unit. 4.2 Link bar specifications
The link bar is the following part, and must be manufactured by the user: L+, L- ･･････ A connection wire used to supply the converter's DC voltage from the power supply unit to
each drive unit. L11, L21 ･････ A connection wire used to supply the 200VAC control power to each unit. This does not necessary need to be a bar (plate), but can be a wire. Link bar specifications The terminal block for link bar connection is the following regardless of the capacity: L+, L- ･･････ M6 screw L11, L21 ････ M4 screw
Spindle drive
Power supply
Link bar
(Front)
Spindle drive
Power supply
Link bar
(Front)
Spindle drive
Spindle drive (1)
Power supply
(1)
Link bar (Front)
Spindle drive (2)
Power supply
(2)
4. Connection of Each Unit
I - 11
An outline connection diagram is shown below for reference. (1) Outline connection drawing
SPT B/C1-CV
P
N
RO
SO
(Note) Mount the terminal cover after wiring as shown on the left. The terminal cover differs for each unit width. Refer to section "8.3 Selection of wire size".
4. Connection of Each Unit
I - 12
4.3 Precautions for installing multiple power supply units
The methods for installing the two-axis spindles are explained here as an example for installing the power supply unit.
NC(PC)
C N 1A 1B 9 5 6 7 8
C
N
4
C N 1A 1B 9 5 6 7 8
C
N
4
C
N
4
C
N
4
MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.1) MDS-B/C1-CV(No.1)
MC1
MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.2) MDS-A/B-CV(No.2)
L+, L-
L11, L21
L+, L-
L11, L21
MC1
200VAC
MC
NFB1 Contactor
AC reactor (A/B-AL NO.1)
L1, L2, L3
AC reactor (A/B-AL NO.2)
L1, L2, L3
Fig. 1
1) Connecting the L+, L-, L11 and L21 link bars Connect the L+ and L- link bars independently with A/B-CV (No. 1) and A/B-CV (No. 2) as shown above. Make sure that both A/B-CV link bars are not short-circuited and connected. Note that the L11 and L21 link bars can be connected together.
2) Connecting and selecting NFB1, contactor and AC reactor The NFB1 and contactor can be shared as shown above. Note that when using the B-CV-370, the rush circuit and contactor operation sequence differ, so the contactor must be installed independently. (The contactor cannot be shared.) Damage will result if the contactor is omitted, or if it shared with the other power supplies. The AC reactors must be installed separately for the A/B-CV (No. 1) and (No. 2).
3) Connecting the MC1 terminal (A/B-CV) When sharing the contactor as shown above, connect the terminal (MC1) for exciting the contactor coil to one of the A/B-CV connections. Set the A/B-CV rotary switch to which MC1 is connected to "0", and set the other switch to "1".
4. Connection of Each Unit
I - 13
4.4 Precautions when installing multiple spindle drive units to one power supply unit
The methods for installing two spindle drive units to one power supply unit are explained here as an example.
NC(PC)
C N 1A1B9 5 6 7 8
C
N
4
C N 1A1B9 5 6 7 8
C
N
4
C
N
4
MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.1) MDS-A/B-CV
MC1
MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.2)
L+, L-
L11, L21
200VAC
NFB1
MC
Contactor
C
N
9
AC reactor (A/B-AL)
Fig. 2
1) Connecting B-CVE/C1-CV and B/C1-SPT Connect B-CVE/C1-CV CN4 and B/C1-SPT (No. 1) CN4 to B-CVE/C1-CV CN9 and B/C1-SPT (No.
2) CN4. If B/C1-SPT for three or more axes is connected, leave CN4 for B/C1-SPT (No. 3) and following open.
Note that the A/B-CV can be controlled (READY ON/OFF, alarm display, etc.) only with the spindle drive unit connected to A/B-CV CN4.
2) Make sure that the machine ready input turns ON and OFF simultaneously for all spindle drive units. Do not allow the signal to turn ON and OFF for only one spindle drive unit.
3) When turning the machine relay input OFF during an emergency stop, always output the zero speed signal with all spindle drive units before turning the signal OFF.
4) If an alarm occurs in one of the spindle drive units, turn OFF the machine ready input OFF for all spindle drive units.
5) When connecting three or more spindle drive units, install the large-capacity drive units on both sides of the power supply unit.
5. Connectioor
I - 14
5. Connector and Cable Specifications 5.1 Half pitch connector and cable connection system
NC (PC)
CN1A 7 8
CN4 CN4 9
Detector
MDS-B/C1-SPT MDS-B/C1-CV
SH21 cable
Cable name
Connector nameon controller side (Maker)
Recommended connector on cable side (Maker)
Cable materials (Maker) Cable creation tool (Maker)
SH21 cable
10220-L8A9VE (3M)
Shell (Crimp type): 10320-3210-000 (3M)Plug (Pressure welding type): 10120-6000EL (3M)
UL2789 AWG28 (DDK) 10PVV-SB AWG28×10P (3M)
Press machine unit (with gage block) : 3794-1000Locator plate : 3795-1A Platen : 3795-2A Cutting unit : 3795-3A Fixture unit : 3796-1A Fixture unit : 3796-2A Fixture unit : 3796-5A Fixture block : 3796-3A Cable clamp : 3796-4
CNP5 cable
Same as above (1) Controller side Plug (soldered-type):
10120-3000VE (3M) Shell (soldered-type):
10320-52F0-008 (3M) (2) Detector side
Connector: AMP-350720-1
(AMP) Pin:
AMP-350689-1 (AMP)
TS-91026 2P×0.3SQ +10P×0.2SQ (DDK) –––––––
CNP6M cable CNP6A cable
Same as above (1) Controller side Same as above
(2) Detector side (a) Magnetic sensor
TRC116-12A10-7F10.5 (Tajimi Musen)
(b) Encoder MS3106A20-29S (Canon)
Same as above
–––––––
CN8A, 10, 11, 12 cable
Same as above (1) Controller side Same as above ––––––– –––––––
5. Connectioor
I - 15
5.2 Cable details
5.2.1 SH21 cable (Semi-ordered part) [For B/C1-CV ⇔ B/C1-SPT connection]
Part No. Part name Model Maker 000 101 Connector (plastic shell) 10320-3210-000 3M 102 Cable 10PVV-SB AWG28×10P (BK0-NC9072) 3M 103 Connector (plug) 10120-6000EL 3M
11
12 10
1
103 101 102 101
103
350 (Standard)
Fix shield onto connector case
Fix shield onto connector case
5. Connectioor
I - 16
5.2.2 Spindle control circuit cable list
Connected device Connected deviceParts name Parts name No. Application
Drive unit side
connection connector
Cable name
Maker Arr
ange
d by
Applicable cable finished state Maker A
rran
ged
by
Spindle drive unitMotor (connector)Motor (lead wire terminal)
(Shell) 10320-52F0-008(Plug) 10120-3000VE
(Connector) AMP-350720-1 (Pin) AMP-350689-1
(1)
Motor temperature switch signal Motor speed detection signal
CN5 CNP5 cable
3M
Sem
i ord
ered
par
t Twisted pair batch shield cable 0.2SQ
Maximum diameter 11mm
Japan Amplifier En
clos
ed w
ith m
otor
Spindle drive unit Magnetic sensor drive unit
(Shell) 10320-52F0-008(Plug) 10120-3000VE
TRC116-12A0-7F10.5 (2)
Orientation detection signal (Magnetic sensor)
CN6 CNP6M cable
3M Sem
i ord
ered
par
t
Twisted pair batch shield cable 0.2SQ
Maximum diameter 11mm
Tajimi Musen
Encl
osed
with
mag
netic
se
nsor
driv
e un
it
Spindle drive unitEncoder
(Shell) 10320-52F0-008(Plug) 10120-3000VE
MS3106A20-29S(3) Orientation detection signal (Encoder)
CN6 CNP6A cable
3M Sem
i ord
ered
par
t
Twisted pair batch shield cable 0.2SQ
Maximum diameter 11mm
DDK
Encl
osed
with
enc
oder
Spindle drive unit NC (PC) (Connector) 54306-2611 (Clamp) 54331-0261
– (4) Communication CN1A
CN7
CN1 cable CN7 cable
MOLEX Tosh
iba
Mac
hine
or
dere
d pa
rt
Batch vinyl shield cable 0.2SQ x 20-core
Maximum diameter 11mm
–
Spindle drive unit NC (PC) (Shell) 10320-52F0-008(Plug) 10120-3000VE
– (5)
Digital speed command pulse feedback
CN9A CN9A cable
3M No
orde
red
part
Twisted pair shield cable 0.3SQ×5
Maximum diameter 11mm
–
–
Spindle drive unitNC (PC) Speedometer Load meter
(Shell) 10320-52F0-008(Plug) 10120-3000VE
– (6) Meter output CN9A CN9A cable
3M
No
orde
red
part
Twisted pair shield cable 0.3SQ×2
Maximum diameter 11mm
–
–
Spindle drive unitPersonal computer RS232C connector
(Shell) 10320-52F0-008(Plug) 10120-3000VE
– (7)
Personal computer for parameter input monitor
CN9A CN9B cable
3M
No
orde
red
part
Twisted pair shield cable 0.3SQ
Maximum diameter 11mm
–
–
5. Connectioor
I - 17
(Note 1) The connector shell on the spindle drive unit is the 3M "10320-52F0-008", but this is a shell with a one-touch locking mechanism that does not require screw locking. When ordering the cables from Mitsubishi, this shell will be used.
However, if the cable is to be manufactured by the user, the shell "10320-52A0-008" (3M) with the screw lock mechanism can be used instead of the above shell.
(Note 2) Keep the length of the cables, excluding the CN9B cable to 30m or less. (The CN9B cable must be 3m or less.)
(Note 3) Do not relay the CNP5, CNP6M or CNP6A cables. Malfunctions could occur due to noise from the motor drive wire or other cables. (Orientation position could dislocate, vibration could occur, etc.)
If the cable must be relayed, keep the peeled shield section as short as possible (3cm or less), and separate the cable from the other drive wires and cables. Mitsubishi will not be held liable for any problems that should occur as a result of a relayed cable. The customer is responsible for providing measures against noise.
5. Connectioor
I - 18
(1) CNP5 cable
Part No. Part name Abbr. Model Qty/type 000 E-type 2-type 101 Connector (shell) CON 10320-52F0-008 1 1 102 Connector (plug) CON 10120-3000VE 1 1 103 104 Cable SEN F-DPEVSB TS-91026 (DDK) 1 1
105 Connector (housing)
CON 350720-1 1
106 Connector (pin) CON 350689-1 8
Length L (L ≤ 30m)
2-type
E-typeDetector connector(CN5) Amplifier connector
Pin No.Pin No.
Green
White
White
Purple
Yellow
Brown
Brown
Red
Fix ground plate to connector case
Black
Blue
CNP5- - Cable name
Connector type E: E-type (crimp terminal on lead end) 2: 2-type (designated connector) Axis No. (Axis 1 to 8) 1:1-axis | | System No. 8: 8-axis None: 1-axis system 2: 2-axis system P: PLC axis Connection connector No.
5. Connectioor
I - 19
(2) CNP6M cable
Part No. Part name Abbr. Model Qty/type 000 E-type 2-type 101 Connector (shell) CON 10320-52F0-008 1 1 102 Connector (plug) CON 10120-3000VE 1 1 103 104 Cable SEN F-DPEVSB TS-91026 (DDK) 1 1 105 Connector CON TRC116-12A10-7F10.5 1 106 107 108
Length L (L ≤ 30m)
2-type
E-type
Detector connector(CN6) Amplifier connector
Pin No.Pin No.
Green
White
Purple
Brown
Brown
Fix ground plate to connector case
Blue
CNP6M- - Cable name
Connector type E: E-type (crimp terminal on lead end) 2: 2-type (designated connector) Axis No. (Axis 1 to 8) 1:1-axis | | System No. 8: 8-axis None: 1-axis system Magnet sensor signal 2: 2-axis system P: PLC axis Connection connector No.
5. Connectioor
I - 20
(3) CNP6A cable Part No. Part name Abbr. Model Qty/type
000 E-type 2-type 3-type 101 Connector (shell) CON 10320-52F0-008 1 1 1 102 Connector (plug) CON 10120-3000VE 1 1 1 103 104 Cable SEN F-DPEVSB TS-91026 (DDK) 1 1 1
105 Cannon connector (angle) CON MS3108B20-29S 1
106 Connector clamp CON MS3057-12A 1 1 107
108 Cannon connector (straight) CON MS3106B20-29S 1
Length L (L ≤ 30m)
2-type
E-type
Detector connector(CN6) Amplifier connector Pin No.Pin No.
Green
White
White
Purple
Yellow
Brown
Brown
Red
Fix ground plate to connector case
3-type
Key way position
Black
Blue
Brown
Purple
CNP6A- - Cable name
Connector type E: E-type (crimp terminal on lead end) 2: 2-type (cannon plug straight type) 3: 3-type (cannon plug L type) Axis No. (Axis 1 to 8) 1:1-axis | | System No. 8: 8-axis Encoder signal (1024P) None: 1-axis system 2: 2-axis system Connection connector No. P: PLC axis
5. Connectioor
I - 21
5.2.3 Cable assembly procedure
(1) Non-shield shell assembly procedure I One-touch locking type
(a)
Shield wire
Peel the outer sheath so that the shield wires are exposed.
(b)
Copper tape
Wrap copper tape or vinyl tape around part of the shield wire section.
(c)
Folded shield wire
Fold the shield wire over the wrapped copper tape or vinyl tape.
(d)
Folded shield wire
Cut off any excess sheath.
(e)
Cable clamp withgrounding plate
After connecting the connector and cable, mount the cable clamp approx. 1 to 2mm from the cable end, and tighten the screw until the cable clamp screw section face contacts closely. (Note) Adjust the No. of copper tape windings in
step (b) so that the shield wire and clamp contact without looseness and so that the clamp's screw section face is closely contacted.
5. Connectioor
I - 22
(f)
Latch
Store a connector and latch at the respective positions on one end of the shell. (The male of the shell is same shape as female's, so store on either side.) (Note) Make sure that the cable does not rise up or
exceed the shell's inner wall to prevent breakage of the cable.
(g)
Set the other shell and tighten with a screw. (Note) Recommended screw tightening torque:
3kgf·cm
(h)
Completion Confirmation items :
• There is no clearance on the shell engaging face.
• The latch can be correctly opened and closed when moved with a finger.
5. Connectioor
I - 23
(2) Non-shield shell assembly procedure II Jack screw (screw locking) type
(a)
Shield wire
Peel the outer sheath so that the shield wires are exposed.
(b)
Copper tape
Wrap copper tape or vinyl tape around part of the shield wire section.
(c)
Folded shield wire
Fold the shield wire over the wrapped copper tape or vinyl tape.
(d)
Folded shield wire
Cut off any excess sheath.
(e)
Cable clamp withgrounding plate
After connecting the connector and cable, mount the cable clamp approx. 1 to 2mm from the cable end, and tighten the screw until the cable clamp screw section face contacts closely. (Note) Adjust the No. of copper tape windings in
step (b) so that the shield wire and clamp contact without looseness and so that the clamp's screw section face is closely contacted.
5. Connectioor
I - 24
(f)
Jack screw
Store a connector and jack screw at the respective positions on one end of the shell. (The male of the shell is same shape as female's, so store on either side.) (Note) Make sure that the cable does not rise up or
exceed the shell's inner wall to prevent breakage of the cable.
(g)
Set the other shell and tighten with a screw. (Note) Recommended screw tightening torque:
3kgf·cm
(h)
Completion Confirmation items :
• There is no clearance on the shell engaging face.
6. Outline Drawing
I - 25
6. Outline Drawing 6.1 List of outlines
Outline
(1) Unit type
2-5 screw 2-5 screw 4-5 screw
(Front)
(Installation) (Installation) (Installation)
Sq
uare
hol
e
Squa
re h
ole
Squa
re h
ole
[Power supply unit] [Spindle drive unit]
Outside box Outside box Inside box Inside box
Power supply
unit Fi
n an
d fa
n
Fin
and
fan
Spindle drive unit
Maintenance area
Maintenance area
(Side) (Side)
(Note) The type A0 unit shown in sections 2(2) and (3) does not have the fins and fin section.
Reg
ener
ativ
e re
sist
or
Power supply unit Spindle drive unit
Capa-city ~ 7.5kW 11kW 15 to
18.5kW 22 to 37kW ~ 3.7kW 5.5 to 11kW 15 to 18.5kW 22 to 30kW
v 60 90 120 150 60 90 120 150 b 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 c 52 82 112 142 52 82 112 142 d 342 342 342 342 342 342 342 342
6. Outline Drawing
I - 26
6.2 Power supply unit
B/C1-CV-37 55 75 B/C1-CV-10
B/C1-CV-150 185
Wiring space
2-ø6 hole
2-ø6 hole
2-ø6 hole
Term
inal
cov
er
Installation hole dimensions
Squ
are
hole
Unit width -8 2-M5 screw
B/C1-CV-220 260 300 B/C1-CV-370
Wiring space
4-ø6 hole
Term
inal
cov
er
Installation hole dimensions
Squa
re h
ole
4-M5 screw
6. Outline Drawing
I - 27
6.3 Spindle drive unit (Note) The front view drawing shows the state with the terminal cover removed.
Wiring space
2-ø6 hole
2-ø6 hole
2-ø6 hole
Term
inal
cov
er
Installation hole dimensions
Squ
are
hole
Unit width -8 2-M5 screw
(Note) The front view drawing shows the state with the terminal cover removed.
Wiring space
4-ø6 hole
Term
inal
cov
er
Installation hole dimensions
Squa
re h
ole
4-M5 screw
6. Outline Drawing
I - 28
6.4 AC reactor
(1) Conventional product (production discontinued)
AC reactor outline drawing
(1) For 30kW or less
55±1 Y
3±1
Y
140
110
165±2
4-6×10 slot
6-M6 screw
Terminal cover
(2) European Standards compliant part
AC reactor outline drawing
(1) For 30kW or less
55±1
Y 3±1
Y
4-8×15 slot
6-M6 screw
155
125
165±2
Terminal cover
(With ground mark) PE connection postiion
MAIN L11 L31L21
L32L22 L12 DRIVE M5 screw
FG connection position
ACL model Corresponding power supply unit Y3 Y MassA-AL BKO-NC6851H01 A-CV-37, A-CV-55, A-CV-75 82 130 3.6kgA-AL BKO-NC6851H02 A-CV-110 75 120 3.0kgA-AL BKO-NC6851H03 A-CV-150, A-CV-185 105 140 5.2kgA-AL BKO-NC6851H04 A-CV-220, A-CV-260, A-CV-300 110 150 6.0kg
AC reactor outline drawing
(1) 37kW
70±1
Y 3±1
Y
175
145
220±2
MAIN L11 L31 L21
L32 L22 L12 DRIVE
4-8×15 slot
6-M6 screw
Terminal cover
(With ground mark)PE connection postiion
M5 screw FG connection position
ACL model Corresponding power supply unit Y3 Y Mass ScrewB-AL-7.5K B/C1-CV-37,B/C1-CV-55,B/C1-CV-75 82 130 3.6kgB-AL-11K B/C1-CV-110 75 130 3.0kg
M5
B-AL-18.5K B/C1-CV-150, B/C1-CV-185 105 140 5.2kgB-AL-30K B/C1-CV-220,B/C1-CV-260,B/C1-CV-300 110 150 6.0kg
M6
ACL model Corresponding power supply unit Y3 Y MassB-AL-37K B/C1-CV-370 110 150 10.0kg
6. Outline Drawing
I - 29
(Note 1) This AC reactor has a PE (protection grounding) terminal for electric shock prevention and an FG (function grounding) terminal for noise measures. Observe the following cautions for treating each terminal. (1) PE terminal ( )
(a) When AC reactor installation side is PE Install the AC reactor unit with screws (bolts) in all four installation holes. Always insert a loosening-prevention washer and spring washer in the screw (bolt)
used for the mark installation hole, and tighten the screw. (b) When AC reactor installation side is not PE Install the AC reactor unit with screws (bolts) in all four installation holes. Always insert a loosening-prevention washer and spring washer and tighten the
screw together with the grounding wire (PE) crimp terminal at the mark installation hole.
The grounding wire used is the same type as the grounding wire connected to the power supply unit.
(2) FG terminal (FG) Screw the function grounding wire crimp terminal at the terminal marked as "FG" on the
top of the AC reactor (terminal block). (With this treatment, the built-in filter's grounding will be directly connected to the
grounding, and the noise withstand level will be improved.) ∗ Function grounding wire: This is a grounding wire not used for protection grounding.
Thus, do not use a green/yellow spiral wire. (Note 2) The dimensions of the terminal cover are as shown on the right. When separately manufacturing a cover, refer to the dimensions on the right.
6.5 Contactor
Refer to the section "8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB". 6.6 NFB
Refer to the section "8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB".
7. Heating Value
I - 30
7. Heating Value
1) Power supply unit (MDA-B/C1-CV) 2) Spindle drive unit (MDS-B/C1-SPT)
Heating value (W) Heating value (W) Model B Series C1 Series
Model B Series C1 Series
CV-37 55 55 SPT-04 - *30 CV-55 65 65 SPT-075 - *40 CV-75 80 80 SPT-15 - *50 CV-110 130 125 SPT-22 - 70 CV-150 160 155 SPT-37 - 80 CV-185 200 195 SPT-55 - 110 CV-220 220 210 SPT-75 - 140 CV-260 270 260 SPT-110 - 185 CV-300 330 320 SPT-150 - 240 CV-370 - 400 SPT-185 - 350 SPT-220 - 375 SPT-260 - 495 SPT-300 - 635 (Note 1) The heating value for the spindle drive unit is for during continuous rated output. (Note 2) For the total heating value for the unit, add the heating value for the corresponding unit above
that is mounted on the actual machine. Example 1) When mounted unit is B-CV-300, B/C1-SPT-150 × 2 units Total unit heating value (W) = 380 + 250 + 250 = 830 (W) Example 2) When mounted unit is B-CV-110, B-SPT-110 Total unit heating value (W) = 125 + 185 = 310 (W) (Note 3) Use the following expression as a guide for the heating value outside the panel when using a
sealed installation. (1) Power supply unit ... Heating value outside panel = (B-CV heating value - 17) × 0.8,
(C1-CV heating value -15) × 0.85 (2) Spindle drive unit ... Heating value outside panel = (B-SPT heating value - 20) × 0.8,
(C1-SPT heating value -20) × 0.85 Note that units in the above table indicated with an asterisk do not have fins, so this
expression does not apply. Only the heating value inside the panel applies in this case. (Note 4) Due to the structure, heat will tend to accumulate that the top of each unit. Thus, install a fan
in the distribution box to mix the heat at the top of each unit.
(Inside box) Wind direction
Spin
dle
driv
e
Pow
er s
uppl
y
Front view of units
FAN3 (Additionally installed by user)Velocity 2m/sec or more * Install a finger guard for safety.
8. Selection of Capacity
I - 31
8. Selection of Capacity 8.1 Selection of the power supply unit (MDS-B/C1-CV)
Select the power supply unit with the following reference. 1) When using the 1-axis spindle drive unit
Power supply unit capacity ≥ Spindle motor 30-minute rated output 2) When using two or more axis spindle drive units
Power supply unit capacity ≥ ∑ (Spindle motor 30-minute rated output) (Note 1) ∑ (Spindle motor 30-minute rated output) is the total of the spindle motor 30-minute rating
(kW). Thus, the motor output and spindle drive unit capacity will not always match so always
substitute the motor output in the above equations. Furthermore, the motor output differs for the acceleration/deceleration and constant speeds,
so substitute the larger output. (Note 2) The power supply capacity is the minimum line up capacity that establishes the above
equations. Example) If the value obtained with the above equation is 13kW, select the 15kW capacity
(B/C1-CV-150) power supply unit. (Note 3) When the power supply unit capacity is 18.5kW or less, if the value obtained on the right of
the above equation is within 0.5kW or less compared to the power supply unit in the line up, the excess amount can be ignored when selecting the power supply capacity.
In the same manner, if the power supply unit capacity is 22kW or more, an excess of 1kW or less can be ignored. Example 1) When value obtained on right of above equation is 15.5kW ... Power supply unit
capacity = 15kW (B/C1-CV-150) Example 2) When value obtained on right of above equation is 15.6kW ... Power supply unit
capacity = 18.5kW (B/C1-CV-185) Example 3) When value obtained on right of above equation is 23.0kW ... Power supply unit
capacity = 22kW (B/C1-CV-220) Example 4) When value obtained on right of above equation is 23.1kW ... Power supply unit
capacity = 26kW (B/C1-CV-260) (Note 4) If the value obtained on the right of the above equation exceeds 38kW, select the power
supply units with a combination that does not exceed this value. Example) When using three axes and the spindle motor capacities are 26kW, 15kW and
7.5kW respectively: Power supply unit (No. 1) capacity is 26kW, and connected spindle drive unit is for 26kW
motor Power supply unit (No. 2) capacity is 22kW, and connected spindle drive unit is for 15kW and
7.5kW motors
8.2 Selection of the power supply capacity The power supply capacity reference values corresponding to the capacity of the power supply unit selected in section 8.1 are shown below.
Power supply unit
B/C1-CV 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
Power supply capacity
reference values (kVA)
7 9 12 17 23 28 33 37 44 54
8. Selection of Capacity
I - 32
The actually required power supply capacity is calculated with the following equation based on the above power supply capacity reference values.
Right value (kW) obtained in equation in section 8.1 Power supply capacity (kVA) Power supply unit capacity (kW) selected from section 8.1
Power supply capacity reference value (KVA)
When using multiple power supply units, the total of the power supply capacity for each power supply unit obtained with the above equation will be the total power supply capacity. Example) When the right value obtained in section 8.1 is 13kW: The A/B-CV-150 power supply unit is selected, so the power supply capacity reference
value (kVA) is 23. Thus, based on the above equation, the power supply capacity (kVA) is (13/15) × 23 = 19.9
(kVA).
8.3 Selection of wire size
(1) Recommended power lead-in wire size (Select the size of the grounding wire on the power supply lead-in side with the same reference.) The wire is selected based on the power supply unit capacity as shown below regardless of the motor type.
Power supply unit
B/C1-CV 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
Recommended power lead-in
wire size
IV3.5SQ or
HIV2SQ
IV3.5SQ or
HIV3.5SQ
HIV5.5SQ
IV14SQor
HIV14SQ
IV22SQor
HIV14SQ
IV30SQor
HIV22SQ
IV38SQ or
HIV30SQ
IV50SQ or
HIV38SQ
IV60SQor
HIV38SQHIV50SQ
(2) Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire (Select the size of the grounding wire on
the spindle motor side with the same reference.) The wire is selected based on the spindle drive unit capacity as shown below regardless of the motor type.
Spindle drive unit C1-SPT-04 C1-SPT-075 C1-SPT-15 C1-SPT-22 C1-SPT-37 C1-SPT-55 C1-SPT-75Recommended
wire size for spindle motor
output wire
IV2SQ or HIV2SQ
IV2SQ or HIV2SQ
IV3.5SQ or HIV2SQ
IV3.5SQ or HIV2SQ
IV3.5SQ or HIV2SQ
IV3.5SQ or HIV2SQ
IV5.5SQ or HIV3.5SQ
C1-SPT-110 C1-SPT-150 C1-SPT-185 C1-SPT-220 C1-SPT-260 C1-SPT-300
IV8SQ or HIV5.5SQ
IV14SQ or HIV14SQ
IV22SQ or HIV14SQ
IV30SQ or HIV22SQ
IV38SQ or HIV30SQ
IV60SQ or HIV38SQ
(Note) The wire sizes recommended in (1) to (2) above are selected with conditions of an ambient
temperature of 30°C and wiring three same tubes. During actual use, select the wire based on the above reference while considering the ambient
temperature, wire material, and wiring state.
(3) Wire size for L11, L21 link bar Regardless of the power supply unit and spindle drive unit capacity, the wire size must be IV2SQ or more. The wire between NFB L11 and L21 must also be IV2SQ or more.
× =
8. Selection of Capacity
I - 33
(4) Wire size for L+, L– link bar [Selection method 1]
To unify the L+ and L– link bar size: In this case, select the following size or larger for the L+ and L– link bars connected to the same power supply unit based on the power supply unit capacity.
Power supply unit
B/C1-CV 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
Recommended wire size for L+ and L– link bar
IV3.5SQor HIV2SQ
IV3.5SQ or HIV2SQ
IV5.5SQor
HIV3.5SQ
IV14SQor HIV8SQ
IV14SQor
HIV14SQ
IV22SQor
HIV14SQ
IV22SQor
HIV14SQ
IV38SQ or
HIV22SQ
IV60SQor
HIV38SQ
IV60SQor
HIV50SQ
[Selection method 2] To suppress the L+ and L– link bar size to the minimum required for each unit: In this case, select as shown below based on the current value that actually flows to the link bar. In this section, the case when three spindle drive units are connected to one power supply unit is explained. The same selection methods apply in all other cases.
Bar1 Bar2 Bar3
I1 I2 I3
L+, L– Link bar
MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.1) MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.2) MDS-B/C1-CV MDS-B/C1-SPT (No.3)
(a) If the current which flows through the L+ and L- bus bars of each drive unit is 11 to 13 as shown
above, the current that flows through each link bar (Bar1 to Bar3) is as follows: I (Bar 1) = I1 I (Bar 2) = I1 + I2 I (Bar 3) = I3
Thus, the wire for each L+, L– link bar should tolerate the above current as a minimum.
(b) The I1 to I3 values are actually obtained with the following equation:
(I1 to I4) = Motor output current × 1.1
Here, the motor output current in the above equation is the following value in correspondence to the spindle drive unit.
Spindle drive unit MDS-B/C1-SPT- 04 075 15 22 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300
Motor output current (A) 4 6 10 17 25 30 40 60 74 94 103 127 165
(c) Obtain I (Bar1) to I (Bar3) using the equations in the previous section based on I1 to I3 obtained with the above equation. Match that value against the following table, and select the IV wire size.
Wire size Tolerable currentIV2SQ 27A
IV3.5SQ 37A IV5.5SQ 49A IV8SQ 61A
IV14SQ 88A IV22SQ 115A IV38SQ 162A IV60SQ 217A Ambient temperature (30°C or less)
8. Selection of Capacity
I - 34
(d) A selection example is shown below. Spindle drive unit Motor Motor output currentNO.1 B/C1-SPT-55 SJ-5.5A 30A NO.2 B/C1-SPT-75 SJ-7.5A 40A
NO.3 B/C1-SPT-150 SJ-15A 74A
When I1 = 30A × 1.1 = 33A I2 = 40A × 1.1 = 44A I3 = 74A × 1.1 = 81.4A
Thus, I (Bar1) = I1 = 33A I (Bar2) = I1 + I2 = 77A I (Bar3) = I3 = 81.4A
Therefore, the following is selected according to the table in (c): Bar1 ....... IV3.5SQ Bar2 ....... IV14SQ Bar3 ....... IV14SQ
(5) Drive unit connection screw size
The screw size for each unit is as follows.
Power supply unit MDS-B /C1-CV
Spindle drive unit MDS-C1-SPT
Capacity (kW) ~ 7.5 11 15 to 18.5 22 to 37 ~ 3.7 5.5 to 11 15 to 18.5 22 to 30 Unit width 60 90 120 150 60 90 120 150 R, S, T, G M4 M5 M5 M8 - - - - U, V, W, G - - - - M4 M5 M5 M8 P, N M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 R0, S0 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 MC1 M4 M4 M4 M4 - - - -
(6) Select the wire size as follows for EC Directives compliance. (The sizes are all mm2 units.)
The wire types are as follows. PVC : Polyvinyl chloride EPR : Ethylene polypropylene SIR : Silicone rubber
(a) MDS-B/C1-CV (L1, L2, L3, PE)
Unit 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370 PVC 2.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 EPR 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 35 50 Wire
SIR 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 16 25 25 Terminal screw size M4 M5 M8
(b) MDS-C1-SPT (U, V, W, PE)
Unit 0.1 0.75 15 22 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300PVC 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 70 EPR 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 Wire
SIR 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 4 6 10 10 16 25 Terminal screw size M4 M5 M8
(c) Wire size for L11 and L21 link bar Regardless of the capacity, the wire size must be 1.5mm2 or more. (This also applies to the
wire between NFB-L11 and L21.)
* In this case, the power supply unit capacity is 5.5 + 7.5 + 15 = 28kW according to the equation in section 8.1, so select MDS-B/C1-CV-300.
8. Selection of Capacity
I - 35
(d) Wire size for L+ and L– link bar (for size unification) Power supply unit
B/C1-CV- 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
PVC 2.5 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 − EPR 1.5 2.5 4 10 16 25 35 35 70 70 Wire
SIR 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 10 10 16 25 35 35 Terminal screw size M6
∗ The above wire sizes follow EN60204 under the following conditions.
• Ambient temperature: 40°C • Wire installed on wall or open cable tray
When using under other conditions, refer to table 5 of EN60204 and Appendix C. 8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB
(a) Select the AC reactor, contactor and NFB from the following table when using only one power supply unit.
Power supply unit capacity To 7.5kW 11kW 15 to 18.5kW 22 to 30kW 37kW
AC reactor (ordered part)
B-AL-7.5K (Mitsubishi Electric)
∗ Refer to section "6. Outline Drawing" for the dimensions.
B-AL-11K B-AL-18.5K B-AL-30K B-AL-37K
Recommended contactor (non-ordered part)
S-N25-AC200V (Mitsubishi Electric)
∗ Refer to section "6. Outline Drawing" for the dimensions.
S-N35-AC200V S-N50-AC200V S-N80-AC200V S-N150-AC200V
Recommended NFB1 (non-ordered part)
NF50CS3P-40A05 (Mitsubishi Electric)
∗ Refer to section "6. Outline Drawing" for the dimensions.
NF50CS3P-50A05 NF100CS3P- 100A05
NF225CS3P- 150A05
NF225CS3P- 175A05
A NFB or CP (circuit protector) can be used as the breaker for the spindle motor fan. Select the NFB or CP by doubling the spindle motor fan rated current value as a guideline. Contact the NFB or CP maker for the recommended wire size.
Recommended NFB2 (non-ordered part)
∗ A rush current that is approximately double the above rated current will flow when the fan is started.
(Note 1) The following applies to the above table: • Ordered parts refer to parts ordered by the user and shipped from Mitsubishi. • Non-ordered parts refer to parts not ordered, but arranged by the user.
(Note 2) Use the EN/IEC Standards compliant parts for the contactor and NFB to comply with the EC Directives.
(b) The power supply unit input currents are shown below for reference.
Power supply unit type B/C1-CV-
37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
Input current (A) 20 30 40 60 70 80 100 120 135 160
Always install one NFB, AC reactor and contactor for each power supply unit. Note that the contactor can be omitted except for the B-CV-370 and larger capacities. (Always install a contactor for the B-CV-370 and larger capacities.)
Spindle motor frame size
71 90 112 132 160 180
Motor fan rated current 0.1A 0.2A 0.2A 0.2A 0.6A 0.6A
8. Selection of Capacity
I - 36
[Reference for contactor selection] Mitsubishi Electric contactor
AC operation AC electromagnetic contactor
AC Class 3 rated working current (A) Support contact Dimensions (mm)
Name Model200 to 220V
380 to 440V
Rated conductivity current (A) Standard Special A B C
Open type Non-reversible type
S-N10 S-N11 S-N12 S-N18 S-N20 S-N21 S-N25 S-N35 S-N50 S-N65 S-N80 S-N95 S-N125 S-N150 S-N180 S-N220 S-N300 S-N400 S-N600 S-N800
11 13 13 18 20 20 26 35 50 65 80 100 125 150 180 220 300 400 630 800
7 9 9
13 20 20 25 32 48 65 80 93 120 150 180 220 300 400
630(800)800(1000)
20 20 20 25 32 32 50 60 80
100 135 150 150 200 260 260 350 450 660 800
1a 1a
1a1b -
1a1b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b
1b 1b 2a -
2a - - - - -
4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b
43 43 53 43 63 63 75 75 88 88
100 100 100 120 138 138 163 163 290 290
78 78 78 79 81 81 89 89 106106124124150160204204243243310310
78 78 78 81 81 81 91 91 106106127127136145174174195195234234
(Note 1) The values given in parentheses for each rated conductivity current apply when the working
ambient temperature is 40°C or less.
S-N21 type
8. Selection of Capacity
I - 37
[Reference for NFB selection]
NFB made by Mitsubishi Electric
Frame A 30 50 60 100 225 400 600 800 Model NF30-CB NF50-CS NF60-CS NF100-CS NF225-CS NF400-CS NF600-CS NF800-CS
Appearance
40°C for general use
Rated current (A) Reference ambient temp. 45°C for
general use
3 5 10 15 20 30
10 15 2030 40 50
(10) (15) (20)
(30) (40) (50)
60 (Note 2)
(50) 60 75 100
(Note 3) (100)
125 150 175
200 225
250 300 350 400 500 600
Adjustable 600
700 800
No. of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 AC 250 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Rated voltage V DC – (Note 1)
250 – (Note 1) 250 – (Note 1)
250 – (Note 1) 250 – (Note 1)
250 (Note 1)
250 –
550V – 1.5 1.5 7.5 10 15 18 18 460V – 2.5 2.5 10 15 25 35 35 AC
220V 2.5 5 5 25 25 35 50 50
JIS (sym)
DC 250V – 2.5 – 2.5 – 7.5 – 10 – 20 20 – 500V – 2.5 2.5 7.5 10 15 18 18 415V – 2.5 2.5 10 15 25 35 35 380V – 5 5 18 18 25 35 35
AC
240V 2.5 5 5 25 25 35 50 50
IEC
(sya)
DC 250V – 2.5 – 2.5 – 7.5 – 10 – 20 20 – 500V – 2.5 2.5 10 15 25 35 35 AC 250V 2.5 5 5 25 25 35 50 50 R
ated
shu
t-off
capa
city
(kA
)
NK (sym)
DC 250V – 2.5 – 2.5 – 7.5 – 10 – – – – a 45 67.5 50 75 50 75 60 90 105 140 210 210 b 96 130 130 155 165 257 275 275 c 52 68 68 68 86 103 103 103
Dim
ensi
ons
(mm
)
ca 67 86 86 86 110 132 155 155 Surface type product mass kg 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.65 0.45 0.65 0.85 1.1 2.0 2.5 5.0 5.8 9.5 10.9
Surface type (F)
For crimp terminal
For crimp terminal
For crimp terminal
For crimp terminal
With barrier
For crimp terminal
With barrier
With bar terminal
With barrier
With bar terminal
With barrier
With bar terminal
With barrierRear surface type (B) –
Round stud
Round stud
Round stud
Bar stud
Bar stud
Bar stud
Bar studInlaid type (FP) –
Con
nect
ion
met
hod
Insertion type (PM)
Page 82
–
IEC157-1
P1
ca
8. Selection of Capacity
I - 38
[Reference for NFB selection]
NFB made by Mitsubishi Electric
Frame A 30 50 60 100 225 400 600 800 Model NF30-CB NF50-CS NF60-CS NF100-CS NF225-CS NF400-CS NF600-CS NF800-CS
Alarm switch (AL) –
Auxiliary switch (AX) –
Voltage trip device (SHT) –
Undervoltage trip device (UVT)
92
–
Electrically controlled type (NFM)
118 – – – –∆
(Sole-noid)
∆ (Solenoid)
(Spring charge)
(Spring charge)
(Spring charge)
Machine mover (MI) 109 – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Lead terminal block (LT) 97 –
Closed type (S) – – – –
Dust-proof type (I) – ∆ ∆ ∆
In b
ox
Water-proof type (W)
106
– – ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
With
acc
esso
ry d
evic
es
Handle lock device (Note 4) (HL) (LC)
116 (LC) (HL) (LC) (HL) (LC) (HL) (LC) (HL) (LC) (HL) (HL) (HL)
F type 98 –
(F032P)
(F03)
(F032P)
(F03)
(F102P)
(F10) (F20) (F40) (F60) (F60)Operation handle (TOTTE) S
type 102 – (S03) (142SS)
(S03) (142SS)
(S10) (141SS) (S20) (42SS) (S41) (60SS) (S40) (61SS) (S40) (61SS)
Terminal cover (TC-L, S) (BTC) 110
(TC-L) (TC-S)
(TC-L) (TC-S) (BTC)
(TC-L) (TC-S) (BTC)
(TC-L) (TC-S) (BTC)
(TC-L) (TC-S) (BTC)
(TC-L) (BTC)
(TC-L) (BTC)
(TC-L) (BTC)
Rear surface stud (B-ST) 84 – ∆ – –
Inlaid installa- tion flame 84 –
Opt
iona
l par
ts
Insert terminal block 85 –
Electrical part type approval ( certified) – – – –
Classification Society approval (NK, LR, BY, AB, CL)
* (Excluding
AB) – * * * * NK, AB, LR
GL
Overcurrent trip method Fully electromagnetic Heat - electromagnetic Heat -
adjustable electromagnetic
Electronic type
(adjustable)
With trip button – Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (Note) (1) Designate when using for DC applications.
(2) 50A and smaller has the same structure as NF50-CS. (3) The rated current 100A for NF225-CS indicates the breaking capacity when the rated voltage
is 380VAC or more (JIS, IEC). (4) Prepare HL in combination with the main unit.
* Acquired
In application
II. MDS-B/C1-CV Power Regeneration Type Power Supply Section
1. Power Supply Unit
II - 1
1. Power Supply Unit 1.1 Model configuration
Model configuration of power supply unit MDS-B/C1-CV -
Power supply capacity class symbol Symbol Capacity
37 3.7kW 55 5.5kW 75 7.5kW 110 11.0kW 150 15.0kW 185 18.5kW 220 22.0kW 260 26.0kW 300 30.0kW 370 37.0kW
Specifications None : Standard specifications S : Special specifications
Note 1) The model indication MDS-B/C1-CV in this section indicates both the standard specifications (MDS-B/C1-CV) and the special specifications (MDS-B/C1-CVS).
WARNING Do not omit the external contactor when using the MDS-B/C1-CV-370 or larger capacity. Failure to install one could result in damage.
1. Power Supply Unit
II - 2
1.2 List of specifications
Power supply unit model (B/C1-CV-)
Unit 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
Output voltage 270V
Main circuit method Converter with regenerative circuit (IPM incorporated)
Tolerable ambient temperature °C 0 to 55°C
Tolerable ambient relative humidity % 99% or less (with no dew condensation)
Storage temperature °C –15°C to 70°C
Storage relative humidity % 99% or less (with no dew condensation)
Atmosphere No harmful gases or dust
Tolerable vibration G 1G
Tolerable impact G 5G (acceleration)
Maximum heating value W 55 65 80 130 160 200 220 270 330 420
Mass kg 5.0 5.0 5.0 8.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
Capacity kW 3.7 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 26.0 30.0 37.0
+10%Tolerable power voltage V 200/200 to 230V
-15%50/60Hz±3Hz
Noise dB (A) 55dB or less
1. Power Supply Unit
II - 3
1.3 Hardware and parameter setting
(1) Hardware settings
Set the rotary switch (SW1) as shown below. SW1
setting B/C1-CV specifications
0 During operation with contactor (deposits are detected)
1 During operation with no contactor
External emergency stop When not used
2
3 Setting prohibited
4 During operation with contactor (deposits are detected)
5 During operation with no contactor
External emergency stop When used
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Setting prohibited
Open the cover (right side of LED status indication window) on the upper front of the MDS-B/C1-CV power supply unit, and turn the rotary switch to set the presence of the external contactor. In the example on the left, a contactor is present. Note that the external contactor cannot be omitted for the MDS-B/C1-CV-370. Thus, SW1 cannot be set to "1" or "5".
Charge lamp
1. Power Supply Unit
II - 4
1.4 Status display
WARNING 1. Do not touch the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.2. Do not operate the unit with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged
sections will be exposed, and can cause electric shocks. 3. Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this
could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION 1. Check and adjust each parameter before starting operation. Failure to do so could lead to
unforeseen operation of the machine. 2. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot
during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns.
1.4.1 7-segment LED display
(1) Power ON
?
(2) Display during alarm (example shows overvoltage alarm)
(3) Display during warning (This example shows the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure warning)
(4) Watch dog alarm
Initializing
?
Ready OFF
?
?
Ready ON, servo OFF
Servo ON
The alarm No. flickers Not lit Alarm No.
The warning No. flickers Not lit Warning No.
1.4.2 Charge lamp
This lamp turns ON when the rectified voltage across P-N is charged over a set level. Always confirm that the charge lamp is not lit, and using a tester, confirm that the voltage has been discharged before starting maintenance work such as replacing the unit.
↓
↓
↓
↓
1. Power Supply Unit
II - 5
1.5 List of alarms and warnings
CAUTION To reset the alarm, remove the cause, confirm that the run signal is not input and ensure the surrounding safety. Then, turn the power ON/OFF or turn the alarm reset signal ON/OFF to resume operation.
If an alarm occurs in the spindle amplifier, the base interception will be carried out and the motor will coast to a stop. To prevent fires, etc., set a sequence that cuts off the input power with an external sequence.
(1) Alarm
Alarm No. LED display Name Meaning Mo-
tionRe-
lease
61 Power module overcurrent
An overcurrent (Ic) was detected in the power module (IPM). a PR
63 Auxiliary regeneration error
The auxiliary regenerative transistor is still ON. a PR
65 Rush relay error The rush resistance short-circuit relay has not turned ON. a PR
67 Open phase One of the input power phases (R, S, T) is open. a PR
68 Watch dog The power supply software process did not complete within the set time. a AR
69 Ground fault There is a ground fault in the motor. This is detected only at READY ON. a PR
6A External contactor melt
The externally installed contactor turned ON even during READY OFF. a PR
6B Rush relay melting The rush resistance short-circuit relay is still ON. a PR
6C Main circuit error The main circuit capacitor charging operation is not normal. a PR
6E Memory error An error occurred in the memory circuit. a AR
6F A/D converter errorPower supply error
An A/D converter error or power supply error was detected. a AR
71
Instantaneous stop
The external contactor turned OFF even during READY ON. An instantaneous power stop occurred for 55ms or more.
a PR
73 Over-regeneration The regeneration performance limit of the power supply was exceeded. a PR
(Note)
75 Overvoltage The voltage between L+ and L– exceeded 410V. a PR
76
External emergency stop setting error
The rotary switch setting and parameter (PTYP) setting do not match. a AR
77 Power module overheat
Overheating of the power module (IPM) was detected. a PR
(Note 1) With alarm "73", to prevent immediately resumption of operation from the over-regeneration state, the alarm cannot be released unless the control power (L11, L12) continuity state has continued for 15 minutes or more after the alarm has occurred. The alarm cannot be released even if the NC power or control power is turned ON immediately after the alarm occurs. If the power is turned ON immediately after the alarm occurred, wait 15 minutes or more in the continuity state, and then turn the power ON again.
*1
*1
1. Power Supply Unit
II - 6
(2) Warning
Alarm No. LED display Name Meaning Mo-
tionRe-
lease E8
o
Auxiliary regeneration frequency over
Regeneration at the limit of the power supply's regeneration capacity is occurring frequently.
b –
E9
p Instantaneous stop
warning
An instantaneous power stop occurred for 25ms or more. (As the main circuit voltage has not dropped, an alarm has not occurred.)
b –
EA
q
External emergency stop input
The external emergency stop input signal was input. (24V is not applied on the CN23 connector.)
b –
EB r Over-regeneration warning
80% of the over-regeneration alarm level was reached. b –
*1 These alarms and warnings have been added from the MDS-B Series. Note 2) The alarm No. in the above table indicates the alarm No. displayed on the spindle drive unit's
LED, and the LED display indicates the alarm No. displayed on the power supply unit. Note 3) The spindle drive unit operation and resetting methods are as follow when the above alarms
or warnings occur. [Operation] a: The spindle drive unit is carried out base interception, the external contactor turns OFF, and the spindle motor coasts to a stop. b: Only a warning is displayed. Operation continues. [Resetting methods] AR : Turn the spindle drive unit and power supply power OFF once. PR : Turn the spindle drive unit reset input signal ON and OFF. – : Operation is automatically resumed after the warning is reset.
*1
1. Power Supply Unit
II - 7
1.6 Explanation of connectors and terminal block
A connector for connecting the CN23 external emergency stop has been added to the MDS-B Series.
Name Application Remarks CN4
CN9
For connection of spindle drive unit (CH1) For connection of spindle drive unit (CH2)
When connecting only one spindle drive unit, always connect to the CN4 side. Connector
CN23 For connection of the external emergency stop
Added with MDS-B.
TE2 P N
Converter voltage output (+) Converter voltage output (–)
TE3
R0 S0
MC1
For externally installed contactor relay control
Terminal block
TE4
R S T G
3-phase input power 200/220VAC Ground
200VAC single phase input
1. Power Supply Unit
II - 8
1.7 Functions added with MDS-B Series (Power supply external emergency stop function)
(1) Outline
In addition to the emergency stop signal using the NC bus line, an emergency stop signal isolated from the outside has been added to provide double protection. The specifications are the same as the A Series even when this function is not used.
(2) Details of detection
(a) Setting When using the external emergency stop, the protection setting must be validated with the rotary switch on the front of the MDS-B-CV and the parameter (PTYP) of the connected drive unit. Rotary switch : External contactor valid....... Set to 4 External contactor invalid.... Set to 5 Parameter (PTYP) : Add 0040 to the currently set value.
(Example)
Current Setting value 0008 0048 0030 0070
Note) If either of the settings are not made, an "external emergency stop setting error" will
occur.
(b) Detection details If the external emergency stop input is detected continuously for 200ms or more, this function will start. If the contactor OFF command from the NC is not received within 30 seconds after the external emergency stop input is detected, the CV itself will turn the contactor OFF.
(c) Alarm (Warning) list
CV display (flicker)
Connected drive unit display Alarm/warning details
m 76 External emergency stop setting error
q EA Emergency stop state is applied from NC when external emergency stop input is input.
q 6F When emergency stop from NC is not applied even when the external emergency stop is input
View A
1. Power Supply Unit
II - 9
(3) Connection
Emergency stop input
The left drawing shows an example of the emergency stop input.
(4) Connector name
Part No. Name Type Maker 101 Connector 2-178288-3 AMP 102 Contact 1-175218-2 AMP
Wire size: 0.5 to 1.25SQ
Drive unit side
24VDC
* The current that flows when the contact is ON is 15mA.
Make sure not to mistake the polarity. (This function will not work if the 24VDC
polarity is mistaken.)
1. Power Supply Unit
II - 10
1.8 Main circuit connection
WARNING
Provide Class 3 or higher grounding for the spindle amplifier and spindle motor.
CAUTION 1. Correctly connect the spindle amplifier and spindle motor power phase order (U, V, W).
Failure to do so could result in abnormal operation of the spindle motor. 2. Apply only the designated voltage on each terminal. Failure to observe this could result in
ruptures or faults.
200/230VAC 50/60Hz
Motor
AC reactor
Contactor
Cabinet grounding
Cabinet grounding
Power supply unit MDS-A/B-CV
Spindle drive unit MDS-A/B-SPA
1. Power Supply Unit
II - 11
* Starting with production in April 1995, a grounding bar has been attached to each unit before shipment. Wire as shown below, and do not tighten the grounding wires together.
Cabinet groundingCabinet grounding
Spindle drive unit side Power supply unit side
Precautions for connections (1) The wires and crimp terminals will differ according to the capacity. (Refer to "8.3" in the Chapter I MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section.) (2) A 200V class power supply is used. The main circuit section does not have a transformer so always ground it. (3) The phase order of the power supply terminals L1, L2, L3 is random. (4) Refer to "8.4" in the Spindle System Configuration Section for the selection of the contactor, AC
reactor and Circuit Breaker connected to the power supply. (5) Connect the specified power supply to the amplifier's power supply terminal (L1, L2, L3). If the
power voltage is not as specified, use a transformer to adjust to within the specifications. (6) Do not connect the power wires (L1, L2, L3) to the spindle motor output terminals (U, V, W). (7) Confirm that the spindle motor output terminal (U, V, W) and spindle motor terminal (U, V, W) phase
order matches. (8) Do not connect a commercial power supply directly to the spindle motor. (9) Check once again that the wires are connected correctly as indicated in the connection diagram.
III. MDS-B/C1-SPT
Spindle Drive Unit System Section
2. Specifications
III - 1
1. Model, Configuration and Connection
1.1 Model configuration
SJ
SJ
Name for AC spindle motor series
Motor type None:
Mid-large capacity
N : Small capacity
V : Small sizedmid-large capacity
15 min. (or 30 min.) rated output capacity (kW)
5.5
Basic speed A : 1500r/minB : 1150r/minL : 5000r/minX : Special
speed
Special specification H : High-speed type Z : Special max. speed W : Wide range
constant output
M : With Z-phase
Motor
(Note) Refer to the separate Built-in Motor Standard Specifications (BFN-14118-04) for details on the built-in motor models.
Control-ler
MDS-B/C1-SPT
TOSNUC corresponding to AC spindle inverter (Spindle drive unit)
Output capacity
None : Standard type : Slim type
(1) When between 0.1kW or more and less than 1kW
0
(2) When 1kW or more 0.1kW will be 1. (Example) For 3.7kW → 37 For 30kW → 300
0.01kW will be 1. (Leave blank when 0.)
0.1kW will be 1.
(Example) For 0.4kW → 04 For 0.75kW → 075
2. Specifications
III - 2
1.2 Configuration 1.2.1 Basic configuration (No additional specifications)
CN1A Connect with NC
CN7
U V W
CN8
CN5 CN6
CN9 CN4
Terminator
Connect with CV
PLG
• For coil changeover MC • To check pin card
MDS-B/C1-SPT
Motor build-in encoder Motor thermoswitch
Connect with NC
Connect with NC
1.2.2 With orientation function (1) Magnetic sensor orientation (1-point) specifications
CN1A
CN7
U V W
CN8
CN5 CN6
CN9 CN4
Detector Sensor
Magnet
PLG
Magnet sensor
MDS-B/C1-SPT
Connect with NC Terminator
Connect with CV • For coil changeover MC• To check pin card
Connect with NC
Connect with NC
(2) Encoder orientation (4096-point) specifications
CN1A
CN7
U V W
CN8
CN5 CN6
CN9 CN4PLG
MDS-B/C1-SPT
ENC Encoder for orientation 1024p/rev
Connect with NC Terminator
Connect with CV • For coil changeover MC • To check pin card
Connect with NC
Connect with NC
2. Specifications
III - 3
(3) Z-phase motor built-in encoder orientation (4096-point) specifications
CN1A
CN7
U V W
CN8
CN5 CN6
CN9 CN4PLG
MDS-B/C1-SPT
Z-phase motor built-in encoder Motor temperature switch
Connect with NC Terminator
Connect with CV • For coil changeover MC • To check pin card
Connect with NC
Connect with NC
2. Specifications
III - 4
1.3 Device-to-device connections
EMG+ EMG- ALARM+
ALARM- HTD+ HTD-
HRD+ HRD
ANS+
ANS-
REQ+
REQ-
GND
FG
7
17
3
13
2
7
17
6
16
1
11,15
AH
AL
BH
BL
ZH
ZL
DAT+
DAT- FG
2
12
3
13
4
14
5
15
CN6
CN20 CN1A
CN7
CN8
PNS2
PNS2
PNS1 GROUND
(PE)
(GND)
(N15)
(PZ)
(N15)
(PA) (RA)
(PB)(RB)
9
6
5
8
1
2
3
4
U
V
W
Connector case
PLG
I.M
U
V
W
(P.S)
(GND)
(MA)
(MA*)
(MB)
(MB*)
(MZ)
(MZ*)
H
K
A
N
C
R
P
B
CN6
(MOH)
(RG)
OHS1
OHS2
CN5
FM
CN4
DG
(MAG)
(MAGR)
(LS)(LSR)17
(P15)
(GND)
A
D
F
E
C
B
CN6
AG
THERMAL PROTECTOR
ORIENT ROTARY ENCORDER
ORIENT MAGNETIC SENSER
PULSE SIGNAL GENERATOR
INDUCTION MOTOR
TYPE MDS-B/C1-SPT-
1 to 20 Connector caseL11 L21 L+ L
TYPE MDS-B/C1-CV-
CN4
L3 L2 L1
A-AL
Contactor
T(1,3)
T(1,2) T(1,1)
NFB1
NFB2
MC1
E
BV
BUBLOWER
CN1B
CN4
CN6
CN8
CN1A
CN9
CN5
CN7
Connector wiring
1
20
CN1B
Terminator (A-TM)
CN9
L11(GND)
9
19 AG
D/A output 1/speedometer 10V max. speed
D/A output 2/load meter 10V 120% torque
8
18 RA
RG
Coil changeover output signal
Spindle/C-axis changeover signal
L11 L21 L+ L-
1
15
8
5
6
16
7
17
3
13
AG
RG
19,10 20
111, 15
12
2
3
13
4
14
16
6
7
17
5
15
(P.S)
(GND)
(MA)
(MA*)
(MB)
(MB*) (MZ)
(MZ*)
H
K
F
L
G
M
T
S
CN7
DG C-AXIS ENCORDER
19,10 20
111, 15
12
2
3
13
4
14
11
13
17
19
18
20
22
24
2
4
3
5
26
14
12
4
14
RA
11
12
13
14
9
10
7
8
15
RG
CNC 1 to 20 Connector case
Connector case
Connector case
Connector case
2. Specifications
III - 5
2. Specifications 2.1 AC spindle motor and controller specifications
(Note 1) The rated output is guaranteed with the power supply unit's rated input voltage (200/220/230VAC). The rated output may not be achieved if the input voltage fluctuates and drops this level.
(Note 2) Contact Mitsubishi when a rated output range other than 1:8, or 1:12 is required. (Note 3) The 50% ED rating is ON for five minutes and OFF for five minutes in the 10 minute cycle time. (Note 4) Refer to section I and II for details on the drive unit’s power capacity, total heating value, rated
power voltage and mass. (Note 5) Refer to the separate Built-in Motor Standard Specifications (BFN-14118-04) for details on
the built-in motor. Series
Item Base speed 1500rpm Series
SJ- Model 5.5A 7.5A 11AP 11A 15A 18.5A 22AP 22A 26A 30A
Cont. rating (HP)/(kW) 5/3.7 7/5.5 9/7 10/7.5 15/11 20/15 20/15 25/18.5 30/22 30/22
Out
put
capa
city
30 min. rating (HP)/(kW) 50% ED rating
7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11 15/11 20/15 25/18.5 30/22 30/22 35/26 40/30
Basic speed (rpm) 1500
Spe
ed
Max. speed (rpm) 8000 6000 4500
Frame No. A112 B112 B132 C132 A160 B160
Cont. rated torque (kg·m) 2.4 3.57 4.54 4.87 7.15 9.74 9.74 12.0 14.3
GD2 (kg·m2) 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.17 0.21 0.27 0.32 0.55 0.69Mass (kg) 60 70 75 100 110 130 150 175 200Tolerable radial load (kg) 150 200 300 Cooling fan capacity (W) 35 130 Vibration V5 V10 Noise (dB) [A] 75 80 Installation Horizontal or vertical (output shaft down) Overload withstand level 120% of 30-minute rated output for 1 minute or less Ambient temperature (°C) 0 to 40 Insulation class F class Paint color Munsell 5.27G 2.46/0.21 Accessories Pulse generator and overheat detector Bearing lubrication method Grease
AC
spi
ndle
mot
or
Output characteristics drawing Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3 Series
Item MDS-B/C1-SPT-
Model 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 MDS-B/C1-CV Compatible power supply unit
model 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 Main circuit IGBT IPM sinusoidal wave PWM inverter Control circuit Pulse generator speed feedback, digital closed-loop control, vector control Braking Power regeneration type Speed control range (rpm) 35 to 8000 35 to 6000 35 to 4500 Speed fluctuation rate Max. 0.2% of maximum speed (under load varying from 10% to 100%) Speed command Analog command ± 10V (or +10V) max. (Input impedance approx. 10KΩ) Ambient temperature/humidity 0°C to 55°C / 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)
Atmosphere To be free from detrimental gas and dust (to conform with "grade C" environmental resistance specified by JEM1103)
Vibration 1G or less
Driv
e un
it
Compliant standards IEC
2. Specifications
III - 6
Series
Item Wide (1 : 8) rated output Series Wide (1 : 12) rated output Series
SJ- Model 5.5XW8 7.5XW8 11XW8 15XW8 18.5XW8 5.5XWC 7.5XWC 11XWC 15XWC
Cont. rating (HP)/(kW) 5/3.7 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11 20/15 5/3.7 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11
Out
put c
apac
ity
30 min. rating (HP)/(kW) 50%ED
7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11 20/15 25/18.5 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11 20/15
Basic speed (rpm) 750 625 500 400
Spe
ed
Max. speed (rpm) 6000 5000 6000 4800 Frame No. B112 B132 C132 B160 B180 B132 A160 B180 A200 Cont. rated torque (kg-m) 4.80 7.14 9.74 17.1 23.3 7.20 13.4 18.3 26.8 GD2 (kg-m2) 0.12 0.21 0.32 0.69 1.36 0.21 0.55 1.26 2.19 Mass (kg) 75 110 150 200 300 110 175 300 390 Tolerable radial load (kg) 200 300 400 300 400 600 Cooling fan capacity (W) 35 130 35 180 3ø60 Vibration V5 V10 V5 V10 Noise (dB)[A] 75 80 75 80 85 Installation Horizontal or vertical (output shaft down) Overload withstand level 120% of 30-minute rated output for 1 minute or less Ambient temperature (°C) 0 to 40 Insulation class F class Paint color Munsell 5.27G 2.46/0.21 Accessories Pulse generator and overheat detector
Bearing lubrication method Grease
AC
spi
ndle
mot
or
Output characteristics drawing Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Series Item MDS-B/C1-SPT-
Model 110 220 260 300 110 150 260 300 MDS-B/C1-CV- Compatible power supply
unit model 55 75 110 150 185 55 75 110 150 Main circuit IGBT IPM sinusoidal wave PWM inverter Control circuit Pulse generator speed feedback, digital closed-loop control, vector control Braking Power regeneration type
Speed control range (rpm) 35 to 6000 35 to 5000 35 to 6000 35 to 4800
Speed fluctuation rate Max. 0.2% of maximum speed (under load varying from 10% to 100%) Speed command Analog command ± 10V (or +10V) max. (Input impedance approx. 10KΩ) Ambient temperature/humidity 0°C to 55°C / 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)
Atmosphere To be free from detrimental gas and dust (to conform with "grade C" environmental resistance specified by JEM1103)
Vibration 1G or less
Driv
e un
it
Compliant standards IEC
2. Specifications
III - 7
Series
Item High-speed Series
SJ- Model 5.5AZ 7.5AZ 5.5LH 7.5LH 11LH 15LH
Cont. rating (HP)/(kW) 5/3.7 7/5.5 5/3.7 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11
Out
put c
apac
ity
30 min. rating (HP)/(kW) 50%ED
7/5.5 10/7.5 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11 20/15
Basic speed (rpm) 1500 5000 5000
Spe
ed
Max. speed (rpm) 10000 20000 15000 Frame No. A112 B112 A100 B100 B132 C132 Cont. rated torque (kg-m) 2.4 3.57 0.72 1.07 1.46 2.14 GD2 (kg-m2) 0.08 0.10 0.02 0.025 0.07 0.095 Mass (kg) 60 70 60 65 95 115 Tolerable radial load (kg) 140 5 Cooling fan capacity (W) 35 Vibration V5 Noise (dB)[A] 75 85 Installation Horizontal or vertical (output shaft down) Overload withstand level 120% of 30-minute rated output for 1 minute or less Ambient temperature (°C) 0 to 40 Insulation class F class Paint color Munsell 5.27G 2.46/0.21 Accessories Pulse generator and overheat detector Bearing lubrication method Grease Oil air lubrication
AC
spi
ndle
mot
or
Output characteristics drawing Fig. 8 Fig. 9 Fig. 10
Series Item MDS-B/C1-SPT-
Model 55 75 110 150 MDS-B/C1-CV- Compatible power supply
unit model 55 75 55 75 110 150 Main circuit IGBT IPM sinusoidal wave PWM inverter Control circuit Pulse generator speed feedback, digital closed-loop control, vector control Braking Power regeneration type Speed control range (rpm) 35 to 10000 35 to 20000 35 to 15000 Speed fluctuation rate Max. 0.2% of maximum speed (under load varying from 10% to 100%) Speed command Analog command ± 10V (or +10V) max. (Input impedance approx. 10KΩ) Ambient temperature/humidity 0°C to 55°C / 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)
Atmosphere To be free from detrimental gas and dust (to conform with "grade C" environmental resistance specified by JEM1103)
Vibration 1G or less
Driv
e un
it
Compliant standards IEC
2. Specifications
III - 8
Series
Item SJ-N Series
SJ-N Model 0.75A 1.5A 2.2X 2.2A 3.7A 5.5AP 5.5A 7.5A
Cont. rating (HP)/(kW) 0.5/0.4 1/0.75 2/1.5 2/1.5 3/2.2 5/3.7 5/3.7 7/5.5
Out
put c
apac
ity
30 min. rating (HP)/(kW) 50%ED
1/0.75 10min.
2/1.5
10 min.
3/2.2
15 min.
3/2.2
15 min.
5/3.7
15 min.
7/5.5
15 min. 7/5.5 10/7.5
Basic speed (rpm) 1500 3000 1500
Spe
ed
Max. speed (rpm) 10000 8000 Frame No. B71 C71 A90 B90 C90 A112 B112 Cont. rated torque (kg-m) 0.26 0.48 0.97 1.43 2.4 3.57 GD2 (kg-m2) 0.0045 0.0086 0.017 0.021 0.045 0.058 0.071 Mass (kg) 15 20 33 37 45 63 74 Tolerable radial load (kg) 50 100 150 200 Cooling fan capacity (W) 20 40 55 35 Vibration V5 Noise (dB)[A] 75 Installation Horizontal or vertical (output shaft down) Overload withstand level 120% of 30-minute/15-minute/10-minute rated output for 1 minute or less Ambient temperature (°C) 0 to 40 Insulation class F class Paint color Munsell 5.27G 2.46/0.21 Accessories Pulse generator and overheat detector Bearing lubrication method Grease
AC
spi
ndle
mot
or
Output characteristics drawing Fig. 11
Series Item MDS-B/C1-SPT-
Model 075 15 22 37 55 75 MDS-B/C1-CV- Compatible power supply
unit model 37 37 37 37 55 75 Main circuit IGBT IPM sinusoidal wave PWM inverter Control circuit Pulse generator speed feedback, digital closed-loop control, vector control Braking Power regeneration type Speed control range (rpm) 35 to 10000 35 to 8000 Speed fluctuation rate Max. 0.2% of maximum speed (under load varying from 10% to 100%) Speed command Analog command ± 10V (or +10V) max. (Input impedance approx. 10KΩ) Ambient temperature/humidity 0°C to 55°C / 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)
Atmosphere To be free from detrimental gas and dust (to conform with "grade C" environmental resistance specified by JEM1103)
Vibration 1G or less
Driv
e un
it
Compliant standards IEC
2. Specifications
III - 9
2.2 Output characteristics Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Output P1/P2/P3/P4 SJ-5.5A SJ-7.5A
5.5/3.7/3/2 (kW) 7.5/5.5/4/3 (kW)7/5/4/2.5 (HP) 10/7/5/4 (HP)
30min. rating
Output
Continuous rating
Speed
Output P1/P2/P3/P4 SJ-11AP SJ-11A SJ-15A SJ-18.5A
11/7/8/5 (kW) 11/7.5/8/5.5 (kW) 15/11/11/8 (kW) 18.5/15/13.5/11 (kW)15/9/10/7 (HP) 15/10/10/7 (HP) 20/15/15/10 (HP) 25/20/18/15 (HP)
30min. rating Output
Continuous rating
Speed
Fig. 3
Stan
dard
Output P1/P2 SJ-22AP SJ-22A SJ-26A SJ-30A
22/15 (kW) 22/18.5 (kW) 26/22 (kW) 30/22 (kW)30/20 (HP) 30/25 (HP) 25/30 (HP) 40/30 (HP)
30min. rating
Output Continuous rating
Speed
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
Output P1/P2 SJ-5.5XWB SJ-7.5XWB SJ-11XWB 5.5/3.7 (kW) 7.5/5.5 (kW) 11/7.5 (kW)
7/5 (HP) 10/7 (HP) 15/10 (HP)
30min. rating Output
Continuous rating
Speed
Output P1/P2 SJ-15XWB SJ-18.5XWB 15/11 (kW) 18.5/15 (kW) 20/15 (HP) 25/20 (HP)
30min. rating Output
Continuous rating
Speed Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Wid
e co
nsta
nt o
utpu
t
Output P1/P2 SJ-5.5XWC 5.5/3.7 (kW)
7/5 (HP)
30min. rating Output
Continuous rating
Speed
Output P1/P2 SJ-7.5XWC SJ-11XWC SJ-15XWC 7.5/5.5 (kW) 11/7.5 (kW) 15/11 (kW)
10/7 (HP) 15/10 (HP) 20/15 (HP)
30min. rating Output
Continuous rating
Speed
Fig. 8 Fig. 9 Fig. 10
Hig
h-sp
eed
Output P1/P2/P3/P4 SJ-5.5AZ SJ-7.5AZ
5.5/3.7/2.4/1.6 (kW) 7.5/5.5/3/2 (kW) 7/5/3.2/2.4 (HP) 10/7/4/2.6 (HP)
30min. rating
Output
Continuous rating
Speed
Output P1/P2 SJ-5.5LH SJ-7.5LH
5.5/3.7 (kW) 7.5/5.5 (kW) 7/5 (HP) 10/7 (HP)
30min. ratingOutput
Continuous rating
Speed
Output P1/P2 SJ-11LH SJ-15LH
11/7.5 (kW) 15/11 (kW) 15/10 (HP) 20/15 (HP)
30min. ratingOutput
Continuous rating
Speed
2. Specifications
III - 10
Fig.11
10min. rating
Continuous rating
Out
put
10min. rating
Continuous rating
Out
put
15min. rating
Continuous rating
Out
put
15min. rating
Continuous rating
Out
put
15min. rating
Continuous rating
Out
put
15min. rating
Continuous rating
Out
put
30min. rating
Continuous rating
Out
put
30min. rating
Out
put
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
SJ-N0.75A SJ-N1.5A
SJ-N2.2X SJ-N2.2A
SJ-N3.7A SJ-N5.5AP
SJ-N5.5A SJ-N7.5A
2. Specifications
III - 11
2.3 Outline dimension drawings 2.3.1 Motor
Standard flange type 112 to 200 frame
Air outlet
Section BB
Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Cooling fan
Section AA Notes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and
nearby located wall. 2. It can be installed vertically with the shaft down.
Air inlet
Nameplate
Terminal box
S*
DIM IN mmMotor Shaft end Frame No.
D L IE KD KL KH LA LB LC LD LE LF LG LH LJ LL LZ IF LR Q QK S T U W QL *A112F 208 549 152 44 438 102 215 180 250 204 5 164 13 52 7 489 15 317 60 60 45 28 7 4 7 7.5 h6B112F 208 614 152 44 483 102 215 180 250 204 5 164 13 52 7 534 15 317 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 h6B132F 254 677 180 44 516 117 265 230 300 250 5 164 20 55 7 567 15 376 110 110 80 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6C132F 254 742 180 44 581 117 265 230 300 250 5 164 20 55 7 632 15 376 110 110 80 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6A160F 314 785 206 51 600.5 133 300 250 350 310 5 189 20 60 7 675 19 438 110 110 90 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6B160F 314 850 206 51 665.5 133 300 250 350 310 5 189 20 60 7 740 19 438 110 110 90 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6B180F 354 909 238 51 701.5 160 350 300 400 350 5 224 25 68 7 769 19 509 140 140 110 60 11 7 18 15 m6A200F 380 932 272 63 733 202 400 350 450 378 5 278 30 73 7 792 19 581 140 140 110 60 11 7 18 15 m6
Standard leg installation 112 to 200 frame
Air outlet
Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Cooling fan
Section AA
Note: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall.
Air inlet
Nameplate
Terminal box
S*
DIM IN mmMotor Shaft end Frame No.
A B C D E F G H I J K KD KL KH LF LJ L M N Z Q QK R S T U W QC *A112M 349 135 112 206 95 70 15 215 264 40 70 44 298 102 164 6 549 230 180 12 60 45 200 28 7 4 7 7.5 h6B112M 394 135 112 206 95 70 15 215 264 40 70 44 343 102 164 6 614 230 180 12 80 63 220 32 8 5 10 8 h6B132M 389 173 132 252 108 89 17 258 312 45 89 44 338 117 164 6 677 260 218 12 110 80 288 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6C132L 441.5 185.5 132 252 108 101.5 17 258 312 45 89 44 390.5 117 164 6 742 260 243 12 110 80 300.5 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6A160L 440 230 160 312 127 127 20 316 366 55 108 51 365.5 133 189 6 785 310 304 15 110 90 345 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6B160L 505 230 160 312 127 127 20 316 366 55 108 51 430.5 133 189 6 850 310 304 15 110 90 345 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6B180L 508.5 247.5 180 352 139.5 139.5 22 358 418 70 121 51 441 160 224 6 909 350 338 19 140 110 400.5 60 11 7 18 15 m6A200L 506.5 272.5 200 380 159 152.5 25 390 472 85 133 63 447.5 202 278 6 932 400 385 19 140 110 425.5 60 11 7 18 15 m6
2. Specifications
III - 12
Thin type leg installation type
Air outlet
Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Cooling fan
Section AA
Note: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall.
Air inlet
Nameplate
Terminal box
S*
DIM IN mmMotor Shaft end Frame No.
A B C D E F G H I J K KD KL KH LF LJ L M N Z Q QK R S T U W QC *B132LU 312 173 132 320 108 89 17 304 371 45 89 44 262 170 95 6 600 260 218 12 110 80 288 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6C132LU 364.5 185.5 132 320 108 101.5 17 304 371 45 89 44 314.5 170 95 6 665 260 243 12 110 80 300.5 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6A160LU 322 230 160 356 127 127 20 348 446 55 108 51 272 195 118 6 667 310 304 15 110 90 345 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6B160LU 387 230 160 356 127 127 20 348 446 55 108 51 337 195 118 6 732 310 304 15 110 90 345 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6B180LU 399.5 255.5 180 400 139.5 139.5 22 397 495 70 121 51 349.5 222 118 6 800 350 338 19 140 110 400.5 60 11 7 18 15 m6
High-speed 10,000rpm
Air outlet
Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Cooling fan
Section AA
Note: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided
between the cooling fan and nearby located wall.
2. It can be installed vertically with the shaft down.
3. When using with the axis installed horizontally, install so that the ventilation holes come to the left, right and bottom.
Terminal box
S*
Air outlet
Section
Ventilation hole (Three places at * mark)
DIM IN mmMotor Shaft end Frame No.
D L IE KD KL KH LA LB LC LD LE LF LG LH LJ LL LZ IF LR Q QK S T U W QL *A112F 208 549 152 44 438 102 215 180 250 204 5 164 13 52 7 489 15 317 60 60 45 28 7 4 7 7.5 h6B112F 208 549 152 44 483 102 215 180 250 204 5 164 13 52 7 534 15 317 60 60 45 28 7 4 7 7.5 h6
High-speed 15000, 20000rpm
Air outlet
Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Cooling fan Section AA
Note:1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the
cooling fan and nearby located wall. 2. When using with the axis installed horizontally, install so that the
ventilation holes come to the left, right and bottom.
Terminal box
S*
Air outlet
Section
*100F
132F*
1 oil air inlet (M8 x 1 screw)
Oil air inlet (M8 x 2 screws)
1 oil air outlet (PF1/8) 1 oil air outlet (PF1/8)
DIM IN mm
Motor Shaft end Frame No. D L IE KD KL KH LA LB LC LD LE LF LG LH LL LZ IF LR Q QK S T U W QL *
A100F 208 549 152 44 418 102 265 230 300 250 5 164 25 60 469 19 317 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 h6B100F 208 574 152 44 443 102 265 230 300 250 5 164 25 60 494 19 317 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 h6B132F 254 606 180 44 475 117 265 230 300 250 5 164 25 60 526 19 376 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 h6C132F 254 626 180 44 495 117 300 250 350 300 5 164 25 60 546 24 376 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 h6
2. Specifications
III - 13
Air outlet
Section BB
Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Cooling fan
Section AA
Notes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall.
2. It can be installed vertically with the shaft down.
Air inlet
Nameplate
Terminal box
Air inlet
Motor
Frame No. L KL LL
A90F 401 290 341 B90F 431 320 371 DIM IN mm
Air outlet
Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Cooling fan
Section AA
Notes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall.
Air inlet
Nameplate
Terminal box
Motor Shaft end
Frame No.
A B F KL L N R A90S 235 101 50 184 401 130 166 B90L 252.5 113.5 62.5 201.5 431 155 178.5 DIM IN mm
2. Specifications
III - 14
Air outlet
Section BB
Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Cooling fan
Section AANotes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the
cooling fan and nearby located wall. 2. It can be installed vertically with the shaft down.
Air inlet
Terminal box
Air inlet
Nameplate
Motor Shaft end
Frame No. L KL LL LR Q QK S T U W QL
A112F 549 438 489 60 60 45 28 7 4 7 7.5 B112F 614 483 534 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 DIM IN mm
Air outlet
Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Cooling fan
Section AANotes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided
between the cooling fan and nearby located wall.
Air inlet
Nameplate
Terminal box
Motor Shaft end
Frame No. A KL L Q QK R S T U W QL
A112M 349 298 549 60 45 200 28 7 4 7 7.5 B112M 394 343 614 80 63 220 32 8 5 10 8 DIM IN mm
2. Specifications
III - 15
2-M
8 sc
rew
Ai
r inl
et
Coo
ling
fan
Sus
pens
ion
bolt
(M8
scre
w, 3
pos
ition
s)
Lead
s po
rt ca
n be
pla
ce o
n le
ft or
righ
t sid
e.
Sect
ion
BB
Term
inal
box
M
ain
unit
nam
epla
te
Air o
utle
t
Sect
ion
AA
Not
es:
1. A
spa
ce o
f at l
east
30m
m s
houl
d be
pro
vide
d be
twee
n th
e co
olin
g fa
n an
d ne
arb y
loca
ted
wal
l. 2.
It c
an b
e in
stal
led
verti
cally
with
the
shaf
t dow
n.
3. W
hen
rem
ovin
g th
e su
spen
sion
bol
ts fo
r use
, cov
er th
e sc
rew
hol
es w
ith b
olts
, etc
. Th
e sc
rew
leng
th u
sed
shou
ld b
e le
ss th
an th
e su
spen
sion
bol
t scr
ew s
ize ×
1.5.
Fram
e N
o.
C90
F
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 16
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
WARNING 1. Do not operate the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric
shocks. 2. Do not operate the unit with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and
charged sections will be exposed, and could lead to electric shocks. 3. Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe
this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION 1. Check each parameter before starting operation. Unpredictable movements could result
depending on the machine. 2. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor (unit) and spindle motor, etc., will be hot
during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns.
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 17
3.1 Status display with 7-segment LED The status can be displayed on the 7-segment LED on the power supply and spindle drives when the power is turned ON.
MDS-A/B-CV power supply unit
3ø 200/230VAC ON
MDS-A/B-SPA spindle drive unit
3ø 200/230VAC ON
Initializing Initializing
Waiting for READY ON
Alarm No. display at alarm occ rrence
READY ON
READY ON
Waiting for READY ON Emergency
stop
Waiting for servo ON
Servo ON
Normal operation
Reset
Normal operation
Reset or emergency stop
Alarm display during alarm (When the parameter error AL37 occurs, the alarm No. and parameter No. are displayed.)
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 18
3.2 Spindle parameters 1. Parameter
CAUTION Do not make extreme adjustments or changes to the parameters as the operation could become unstable.
(1) Parameter list
Note 1) For the parameters marked with an asterisk in the CNG column, the parameter value set from TOSNUC is validated even without turning the spindle drive unit power OFF.
Note 2) DEC in the TYP column indicates a parameter set with a decimal, and HEX indicates a parameter set with a hexadecimal.
Note 3) If SP257(RPM) is set to "0002", set 1/2 of the required value for all parameters indicated as "r/min" in the Unit column.
Example) To set maximum motor speed to 40000r/min Set SP017: TSP to "20000".
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard setting Unit Tolerable
setting rangeSP001 PGM Magnetic sensor
and motor built-in encoder orientation position loop gain
As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes shorter and servo rigidity is increased. However, vibration is increased and the machine becomes likely to overshoot.
DEC * 100 1/10 rad/s
0 to 1000
SP002 PGE Encoder orientation position loop gain
Same as above DEC * 100 1/10 rad/s
0 to 1000
SP003 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP004 OINP Orientation
in-position width Set the position error range in which an orientation completion signal is output.
DEC * 16 1/16° 0 to 2880
SP005 OSP Orientation mode changing speed limit value
Set the motor speed limit value to be used when the speed loop is changed to the position loop in orientation mode. When this parameter is set to "0", SP017 (TSP) becomes the limit value. If the machine has a large deceleration rate and has two or more gear stages, the orientation speed may differ greatly for each gears and cause the orientation operation to be unstable. Set SP037 (SFNC5) bitD to "1" in this case to stabilize the operation.
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP006 CSP Orientation mode deceleration rate
As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes shorter. However, the machine becomes likely to overshoot.
DEC * 20 0 to 1000
SP007 OPST Position shift amount for orientation
Set the orientation stop position. (1) Motor built-in encoder, encoder (1024p/rev)
orientation Set a value obtained by dividing 360° by 4096. (2) Magnetic sensor orientation Divide -5° to +5° by 1024, and set 0° as "0".
DEC * 0 (1) 0 to 4095 (2) -512 to
512 SP008 to SP016 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP017 TSP Maximum motor
speed Set the motor's maximum speed. DEC 6000 r/min 1 to 32767
SP018 ZSP Motor zero speed Set the motor speed for zero speed output. When one of the forward run, reverse run or orientation signals turns OFF and the motor speed is less than the speed here, the motor will coast to a stop. Set a small value if the spindle hunting amount is large just before stopping from rotation. (Practical minimum setting value = approx. 10)
DEC 50 r/min 1 to 1000
SP019 CSN1 Speed command acceleration/ deceleration time constant
Set the time constant (linear) for the speed command from 0 to the motor's maximum speed. Note that this is invalid after changing to position loop during orientation and during the S-analog synchronous tapping mode. This setting is only the time constant (linear) for the command, and the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time will be determined by the relation of the motor output, load GD2 and frictional torque. This setting is normally set to "30". Set a large value to intentionally lengthen the acceleration/deceleration time.
DEC 30 10ms 1 to 32767
Spi
ndle
spe
cific
atio
ns
SP020 SDTS Speed detection set value
Set the motor speed for which speed detection output is performed. Usually, the setting value is 10% of SP017 (TSP).
DEC 600 r/min 0 to 32767
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 19
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
SP021 TLM1 Torque limit 1 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 001. The 30-minute rated output torque is equivalent to 100%.
DEC * 10 % 0 to 120
SP022 VGNP1 Speed loop gain proportional term under speed control
Set the speed loop proportional gain for speed control. The responsiveness will improve when the value is increased, but the vibration and noise will also increase. (Practical setting range: approx. 30 to 150)
DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
SP023 VGNI1 Speed loop gain integral term under speed control
Set the speed loop integral gain for speed control. Normally, this is set so that the ratio to SP022 (VGNP1) is approximately constant. (Approx. 1:1 with setting values.)
DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP024 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP025
GRA1
Spindle gear teeth count 1
Set the number of spindle side gear teeth in respect to gear 00. When the spindle speed is slower than the motor speed (deceleration specifications), GRA* > GRB* applies. If GRA* or GRB* is larger than 32767, multiple both setting values by 1/N (N is a random natural number), and set a value close to 32767.
DEC
1 1 to 32767
SP026 GRA2 Spindle gear teeth count 2
Set the number of spindle side gear teeth in respect to gear 01.
DEC 1 1 to 32767
SP027 GRA3 Spindle gear teeth count 3
Set the number of spindle side gear teeth in respect to gear 10.
DEC 1 1 to 32767
SP028 GRA4 Spindle gear teeth count 4
Set the number of spindle side gear teeth in respect to gear 11.
DEC 1 1 to 32767
SP029 GRB1 Motor shaft gear teeth count 1
Set the number of motor shaft side gear teeth in respect to gear 00.
DEC 1 1 to 32767
SP030 GRB2 Motor shaft gear teeth count 2
Set the number of motor shaft side gear teeth in respect to gear 01.
DEC 1 1 to 32767
SP031 GRB3 Motor shaft gear teeth count 3
Set the number of motor shaft side gear teeth in respect to gear 10.
DEC 1 1 to 32767
Spi
ndle
spe
cific
atio
ns
SP032 GRB4 Motor shaft gear teeth count 4
Set the number of motor shaft side gear teeth in respect to gear 11.
DEC 1 1 to 32767
SP033 SFNC1 Spindle function 1 Select the spindle function 1 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details.
HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
SP034 SFNC2 Spindle function 2 Select the spindle function 2 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details.
HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
SP035 SFNC3 Spindle function 3 Select the spindle function 3 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details.
HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
SP036 SFNC4 Spindle function 4 Select the spindle function 4 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details.
HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
SP037 SFNC5 Spindle function 5 Select the spindle function 5 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details.
HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
SP038 SFNC6 Spindle function 6 Select the spindle function 6 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details.
HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
SP039 ATYP Drive unit capacity Set the capacity of the drive unit to be used. Refer to section (3) for details.
HEX 0000 0000 to 0010
SP040 MTYP Motor selection This is valid when SP034 (SFNC2) bit-0 is set to "0". Set the applicable motor No. from the motors listed in section (3). This parameter is ignored when SP034 (SFNC2) bit-0 is set to "1".
HEX 0000 0000 to 001F
SP041 PTYP Power supply capacity selection
Set the power supply unit capacity when the drive unit being used is connected with the power supply unit (between CN4-CN4). Set "0" when the drive unit is not connected. Refer to section (3) for details.
HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
SP042 to SP044 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP045 CSNT Fixed control
constant This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 0 to 1000
SP046 CSN2 Speed command dual cushion
Set this to smoothly change the speed command only at the start of the acceleration/deceleration in respect to the acceleration/deceleration time constant set with SP019 (CNS1). If the gears make a noise at the start of acceleration/deceleration, set this to a value other than "0" to reduce the gear noise. Increase the value in increments from "1" and set the value at which the annoying noise is eliminated. The smoothness will increase when this value is small, but the acceleration/deceleration time will be longer. This function is invalidated when "0" is set.
DEC 0 0 to 1000
SP047 SDTR Speed detection reset value
Set the reset value in respect to the speed detection output setting value set in SP020 (SDTS).
DEC 30 r/min 0 to 1000
Spi
ndle
/mac
hine
spe
cific
atio
ns
SP048 SUT Speed reach range
Set the ratio of the speed deflection in respect to the speed command for outputting the speed reached output signal.
DEC 15 % 0 to 100
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 20
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
SP049 TLM2 Torque limit 2 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 010.
DEC * 20 % 0 to 120
SP050 TLM3 Torque limit 3 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 011.
DEC * 30 % 0 to 120
SP051 TLM4 Torque limit 4 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 100.
DEC * 40 % 0 to 120
SP052 TLM5 Torque limit 5 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 101.
DEC * 50 % 0 to 120
SP053 TLM6 Torque limit 6 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 110.
DEC * 60 % 0 to 120
SP054 TLM7 Torque limit 7 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 111.
DEC * 70 % 0 to 120
SP055 SETM Excessive speed deviation timer
Set the time for outputting the excessive speed deviation alarm. If the total of the acceleration, deceleration and time is longer than the standard setting, set a value 1.5-times the total.
DEC 12 sec 0 to 60
SP056 PYVR Variable excitation rate
Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate. If the gear noise and vibration, etc., are large, set a small value. However, this will cause the impact load response to drop. Set "50" unless absolutely necessary. If a value higher than "50" is set to improve the impact load response, make sure that there are no problems such as gear noise, motor excitation noise or vibration during orientation stop, etc. If a value smaller than "50" is set to improve the gear noise, motor excitation noise or vibration during orientation stop, make sure that there are no problems with the impact load response or holding force during orientation stop. (Practical setting range: 20 to 75)
DEC * 50 % 0 to 100
SP057 STOD Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set the value given in the Parameter Setting Table.
DEC 7 r/min 0 to 50
SP058 SDT2 Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP059 MKT Coil changeover base cutoff timer
Set the base cutoff time for changing the contactor during coil changeover. If the value is too small, the contactor could melt. Set a value obtained by adding +50ms to the ON/OFF delay time of the contactor in use.
DEC 150 ms 0 to 10000
SP060 MKT2 Current limit timer after coil changeover
Set the time to limit the current after changing the contactor during coil changeover.
DEC 500 ms 0 to 10000
SP061 MKIL Current limit value after coil changeover
Set the value for limiting the current after changing the contactor during coil changeover. The interval is the time set with SP060 (MKT2).
DEC 75 % 0 to 120
SP062 Not used. Set "0". DEC 0 SP063 OLT Overload alarm 1
detection time Set the detection time for outputting the motor overload alarm 1.
DEC 60 sec 0 to 1000
Spi
ndle
/mac
hine
spe
cific
atio
ns
SP064 OLL Overload alarm 1 detection level
Set the detection level for outputting the motor overload alarm 1.
DEC 110 % 0 to 200
SP065 VCGN1 Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain
Set the ratio of the speed loop proportional gain in respect to SP022 (VGNP1) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP).
DEC 100 % 0 to 100
Spe
ed c
ontro
l
SP066 VCSN1 Change starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain
Set the speed to start changing the speed loop proportional gain. This parameter and SP065 (VCGN1) are changed from the standard value if the motor vibrates in high-speed ranges, etc., when SP022 (VGNP1) is increased from the standard value to improve the responsiveness in respect to the impact load response at low speeds.
SP022
SP022×(SP065/100)
SP066 SP017
Speed
Proportional gain
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 21
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
SP067 VIGWA Change starting speed of variable current loop gain
Set the speed where the current loop gain change starts. DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP068 VIGWB Change ending speed of variable current loop gain
Set the speed where the current loop gain change ends. DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP069
VIGN Variable current loop gain
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount, excitation amount) for the speed set with SP068 (VIGWB).
1-fold
SP069×(1/16-fold)
SP068 SP017
Speed
Gain
SP067
Use the following values are reference for setting SP067 (VIGWA) to SP069 (VING).
DEC 0 1/16-folg 0 to 32767
Maximum motor speedSP017 (TSP)
SP067(VIGWA)
SP068(VIGWB)
SP069(VIGN)
6000 or less 0 0 0 6001 to 8000 5000 8000 48
8001 or more 5000 10000 64
Observe the following when setting this parameter: 1) If the motor seems to hunt (high frequency vibration)
when rotating at high speeds, decrement SP069 (VING) by "-8" at a time, and set a value at which hunting does not occur.
2) If the motor seems to groan (low frequency vibration) when rotating at high speeds, increment SP069 (VING) by "+8" at a time, and set a value at which groaning does not occur.
3) If "AL32" (overcurrent) or "AL75" (overvoltage) occurs when decelerating from the maximum speed, decrement or increment SP069 (VING) by "+8" or "-8" to a value where the alarm does not occur.
4) If there is no problem when rotating at the maximum speed, but phenomenon 1) or 2) occurs during rotation in the medium-speed range, change the SP067 (VIGWA) and SP068 (VIGWB) setting.
SP070 FHz Machine resonance suppression filter frequency
When machine vibration occurs in speed and position control, set the frequency of the required vibration suppression. Note that a value of 100Hz or more is set. Set to "0" when not used.
DEC * 0 Hz 100 to 3000
SP071 VR2WA Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP072 VR2WB Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP073 VR2GN Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP074 IGDEC Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC 0 % 0 to 1000
SP075 R2KWS Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 –32768 to 32767
SP076 FONS Machine resonance suppression filter operation speed
When the vibration increases in motor stop (ex. in orientation stop) when the machine vibration suppression filter is operated by SP070, operate the machine vibration suppression filter at a speed of this parameter or more. When set to "0", this is validated for all speeds.
DEC * 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP077 TDSL Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "14" unless otherwise specified.
DEC 14 0 to 63
SP078 FPWM Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC 0 0 to 9
SP079 ILMT Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC 0 0 to 32767
Spe
ed c
ontro
l
SP080 Not used. Set "0". 0
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 22
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
SP081 LMCA Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 1024
SP082 LMCB Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 1024
SP083 to SP086 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP087 DIQM Target value of
variable torque limit magnification at deceleration
Set the minimum value of variable torque limit at deceleration.
DEC 75 % 0 to 150
Spe
ed c
ontro
l
SP088 DIQN Speed for starting change of variable torque limit magnification at deceleration
Set the speed where the torque limit value at deceleration starts to change.
Speed
Torque limit
1) When using the high-speed rotation (10000r/min or
higher) specifications motor, and occurrence of the "AL32" (overcurrent) or "AL75" (overvoltage) alarm is not improved by changing the SP067 (VIGWA) to SP069 (VING) setting values, decrement the SP087 (DIQM) value by "-15" at a time until the alarms no longer occur.
2) If the above problems are not occurring, and the deceleration time is longer than the acceleration time, change the SP087 (DIQM) value as indicated in the following flow chart. Adjust the deceleration time so that it is the same as the acceleration time. Note 1) Make this adjustment using the H gears for a
machine with gears, and with the H coil for a coil changeover motor. Measure the time with the speedometer output (CN9 No. 9 pin).
DEC 3000 r/min 0 to 32767
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 23
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
Set SP087 to 75 and SP088 to 3000
Measure the acceleration/ deceleration waveform with the spindle maximum speed command
0.95Ta<Td
0.95Ta<Td
1.1Ta<Td
Set this value for SP087.
SP87(-5)
1.1Ta<Td
Note 2) The following apply in the above flow chart. Ta: Acceleration time Tb: Deceleration time
Measure the acceleration/ deceleration waveform with the spindle maximum speed command
Measure the acceleration/ deceleration waveform with the spindle maximum speed command
SP87(+5)
Motor maximum speed
Motor speed
Time
Speedometer output waveform
SP089 to SP090 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP091 OFSN Motor PLG offset
(SRN) Set the PLG offset for motor forward run. Normally, set this to "0".
DEC * 0 –2048 to 2047
SP092 OFSI Motor PLG offset (SRI)
Set the PLG offset for motor reverse run. Set "200" when using the Mitsubishi complete motor, and "0" when using the built-in motor. Set "0" if the complete motor was manufactured after December 1997, and is indicated as "N-PLG" on the motor fan cover.
DEC * Complete Motor = 200 Built-in Motor = 0
–2048 to 2047
Spe
ed c
ontro
l
SP093 Not used. Set "0". 0
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 24
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
SP094 LMAV Load meter output filter
Set the load meter output filter time constant. If this value is large, the ripple during a constant load meter output will decrease, but the transient responsiveness will drop. The time constant will be 100ms when "0" is set.
DEC 0 ×2ms 0 to 32767
SP095 VFAV Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC 0 0 to 4
SP096 EGAR Encoder gear ratio Set the spindle end and encoder gear ratio. This parameter can be set only when the spindle speed is faster (deceleration specifications) than the encoder.
DEC 0 0 to 4
Parameter setting Deceleration rate "0" 1 : 1 "1" 1 : 2 "2" 1 : 4 "3" 1 : 8
Spe
ed c
ontro
l
"4" 1 : 16
SP097 SPEC0 Orientation specification
Select the orientation specifications with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details.
HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
SP098 VGOP Speed loop gain proportional item for orientation
Set the speed loop gain proportional item for orientation. A large value will increase the responsiveness, but will cause the vibration and noise to increase. (Practical setting range: 30 to 200)
DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
SP099 VGOI Speed loop gain integral item for orientation
Set the speed loop integral gain for orientation. Normally, this is set so that the ratio to SP098 (VGOP) is approximately constant. (Approx. 1:1 with setting values.)
DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP100 VGOD Speed loop gain delay advance item in orientation mode
Set the speed loop advance/delay gain for orientation. A large value will increase the impact responsiveness, but will cause the deviation between the orientation stop position from forward run to the orientation stop position from reverse run to increase. PI control is applied when "0" is set. Use this setting when the machine has a high frictional torque or when the inconsistency in orientation stop position is to be decreased. If the spindle is to be fixed mechanically during orientation stop when "0" is set, input a torque limit signal when fixing. Set this to "15" unless there is any particular problem.
DEC 15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP101 DINP Orientation dummy in-position width
This is valid when SP097 (SPEC0) -bit2 is set to "1". If a value larger than the normal in-position width (SP004: OINP) is input here, the ATC time will be shortened so it will appear that orientation is completed sooner. If this value is too large, ATC operation may start before the spindle position reaches the ATC position. Carefully confirm the operation before using this parameter.
DEC 16 1/16° 0 to 2880
SP102 OODR Excessive error value in orientation mode
Set the excessive error width for detecting the excessive error alarm during orientation. Normally, set this to "32767". The excessive error alarm will not be output when "0" is set.
DEC 32767 1/4 pulse (1 pulse =0.088°)
0 to 32767
SP103 FTM Positioning complete OFF time timer
Set the time for forcibly turning OFF the index positioning complete signal after the indexing start signal separately from the orientation complete signal during indexing operation.
DEC 200 ms 0 to 10000
SP104 TLOR Torque limit value for orientation servo locking
Set the torque limit value for orientation stop. The 30-minute rating is equivalent to 100%. If the external torque limit signal is input during orientation stop, the external torque limit value will have the priority. Use this to mechanically fix the spindle during orientation stop when the machine's frictional torque is small and the inconsistency in orientation stop position is small.
DEC 100 % 0 to 120
SP105 IQGO Current loop gain magnification for orientation 1
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for orientation. "100" is equivalent to 100% (1-fold). Change this parameter value when there is vibration during orientation stop which cannot be eliminated even by changing the SP001 (PGM), SP002 (PGE), SP098 (VGOP) or SP099 (VGOI) settings. 1) When there is fine vibration in the frequency Decrease the setting value. 2) When there is fine vibration in the low frequency Increase the setting value. When changing this parameter, always change the SP106 (IDGO) value to the same value. (Practical setting range: 50 to 300)
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
Orie
ntat
ion
cont
rol
SP106 IDGO Current loop gain magnification for orientation 2
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for orientation. Refer to SP105 (IQGO) for details on setting.
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 25
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
SP107 CSP2 Deceleration rate 2 in orientation mode
Set the deceleration rate for orientation in respect to gear 01. Set this to use the shortest orientation time for each gear.The value set in SP006 (CSP) is applied when "0" is set.
DEC * 0 0 to 1000
SP108 CSP3 Deceleration rate 3 in orientation mode
Set the deceleration rate for orientation in respect to gear 10. The setting method is the same as SP107 (CSP2).
DEC * 0 0 to 1000
SP109 CSP4 Deceleration rate 4 in orientation mode
Set the deceleration rate for orientation in respect to gear 11. The setting method is the same as SP107 (CSP2).
DEC * 0 0 to 1000
SP110 to SP113 Not used. Set "0". SP114 OPER Orientation pulse
miss check value If the pulse miss value during orientation stop exceeds this setting, the alarm "5C" will occur. (Set 0 to invalidate.)The orientation start memo setting must always be invalidated when this parameter is set to a value other than "0". (Set SP038 (SFNC6) bit6 to "0".) The following equation applies when using this setting. SP114 setting value ≥ SP004 setting value/16/(360/4096) + 20, or set a multiple of 4 larger or equal to the value calculated with the right side when using PLG orientation.
DEC * 0 360/ 4096°
0 to 32767
SP115 OSP2 Index clamp speed
If SP097 (SPECO) -bit4 is set to "1", the maximum spindle speed for indexing is set here.
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP116 Not used. Set "0". SP117 ORUT Orientation
changeover speed reach range
Set a value here when using a machine with large GD2, and the motor continues to run when orientation is executed from the stopped state, or if it takes a long time for orientation to stop. Normally set this to "0".
DEC * 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP118 ORCT Number of orientation retries
Set the number of times to retry orientation when an orientation pulse miss occurs. This parameter is invalid when SP114 (OPER) is set to "0". Alarm "A9" will appear while retrying orientation, and alarm "5C" will appear if there is a pulse miss even after the designated number of retries.
DEC * 0 time 0 to 100
SP119 MPGH Orientation position loop gain H coil magnification
Set the orientation position loop gain for the H coil when using the coil changeover motor. Set the magnification in respect to SP001 (PGM) and SP002 (PGE), using "256" as 1-fold. The magnification will also be 1-fold when "0" is set. This is used to shorten the orientation time for each coil. However, normally the time is adjusted with SP121 (MPCSH). Use this parameter when the time cannot be adjusted sufficiently with SP121.
DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
SP120 MPGL Orientation position loop gain L coil compensation magnification
Set the orientation position loop gain for the L coil when using the coil changeover motor. The setting method is the same as SP119 (MPGH).
DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
SP121 MPCSH Orientation deceleration rate H coil magnification
When using the coil changeover motor, set the deceleration rate for orientation with the H coil. Set the magnification in respect to SP006 (CSP), using "256" as 1-fold. The magnification will also be 1-fold when "0" is set. This is used to shorten the orientation time for each coil.
DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
SP122 MPCSL Orientation deceleration rate L coil magnification
When using the coil changeover motor, set the deceleration rate for orientation with the L coil. The setting method is the same as SP121 (MPCSH).
DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
SP123 MGD0 Magnetic sensor output peak value
This parameter is used for adjusting the operation during magnetic sensor orientation. Set the peak value of the magnetic sensor output. If the gap between the sensor and magnet is small, set a large value. If the gap is large, set a small value. If the operation stops just before the stop point during magnetic sensor orientation, change this parameter so that the target point is reached. Use the standard setting if there are no problems.
DEC * Standard magnetizing element
= 542 Small magnetizing element
= 500
0 to 10000
Orie
ntat
ion
cont
rol
SP124 MGD1 Magnetic sensor linear zone width
This parameter is used for adjusting the operation during magnetic sensor orientation. Set the width of the magnetic sensor linear zone. If the installation radius of the magnet is large, set a small value. If the radius is small, set a large value. Use the standard setting if there are no problems during orientation.
DEC * Standard magnetizing element
= 768 Small magnetizing element
= 440
0 to 10000
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 26
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
SP125 MGD2 Magnetic sensor switching point
This parameter is used for adjusting the operation during magnetic sensor orientation. Set the distance from the target stop point for changing the position feedback to magnesensor output. Normally, a value that is approximately half of SP124 (MGDI) is set.
DEC * Standard magnetizing element
= 384 Small magnetizing element
= 220
0 to 10000
SP126 to SP127 Not used. Set "0". 0
Orie
ntat
ion
cont
rol
SP128 VRFB Speed command specifications
Designate the number of valid bits in the speed command.Setting value "0": All 32 bits of the speed command are
valid Setting value "1": The high-order 19 bits are valid
DEC 0 0 to 1
SP129 PFBC Position feedback polarity
Set the direction to count the position feedback returned to TOSNUC.
Setting value "0": Count up with spindle CW rotation Setting value "1": Count up with spindle CCW rotation
DEC 0 0 to 1
SP130 VGHP1 Speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 1
Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 1. The responsiveness will improve when the value is increased, but the vibration and noise will also increase. (Practical setting range: 30 to 200)
DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
SP131 VGHI1 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 1
Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 1. Normally, this is set so that the ratio to SP130 (VGHP1) is approximately constant. (Approx. 1:1 with setting values.)
DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP132 VGHD1 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 1
Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 1. A large value will increase the impact responsiveness, but will cause the stop positions to deviate. PI control is applied when "0" is set. Use this setting when the machine has a high frictional torque or when the inconsistency in orientation stop position is to be decreased. If the spindle is to be fixed mechanically during orientation stop when "0" is set, input a torque limit signal when fixing.
DEC 15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP133 HPYV1 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 1
Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 1. If the gear noise and vibration, etc., are large, set a small value. However, this will cause the responsiveness to drop. Increase the value a high response is required at low speeds.
DEC 50 % 0 to 100
SP134 VCGH1 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 1
Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP130 (VGHP1) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 1. Normally, set this to "100".
DEC 100 % 0 to 100
SP135 VCSH1 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 1
Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 1.
SP130
SP130×(SP134/100)
SP135 SP017
Speed
Proportional gain
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP136 IQGH1 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 1
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 1. "100" is equivalent to 100% (1-fold).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
SP137 IDGH1 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 1
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 1. "100" is equivalent to 100% (1-fold).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
SP138 to SP139 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP140 VGHP2 Speed loop gain
proportional item for position control mode 2
Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1).
DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
Pos
ition
con
trol
SP141 VGHI2 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 2
Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1).
DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 27
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
SP142 VGHD2 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 2
Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1).
DEC 15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP143 HPYV2 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 2
Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1).
50 % 0 to 100
SP144 VCGH2 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 2
Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1).
100 % 0 to 100
SP145 VCSH2 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 2
Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP146 IQGH2 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 2
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1).
100 % 0 to 1000
SP147 IDGH2 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 2
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1).
100 % 0 to 1000
SP148 to SP149 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP150 VGHP3 Speed loop gain
proportional item for position control mode 3
Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1).
DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
SP151 VGHI3 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 3
Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1).
DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP152 VGHD3 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 3
Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1).
DEC 15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP153 HPYV3 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 3
Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1).
DEC 50 % 0 to 100
SP154 VCGH3 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 3
Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 100
SP155 VCSH3 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 3
Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP156 IQGH3 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 3
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
SP157 IDGH3 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 3
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
SP158 to SP159 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP160 VGHP4 Speed loop gain
proportional item for position control mode 4
Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1).
DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
SP161 VGHI4 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 4
Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1).
DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP162 VGHD4 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 4
Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1).
DEC 15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
Pos
ition
con
trol
SP163 HPYV4 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 4
Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1).
DEC 50 % 0 to 100
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 28
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
SP164 VCGH4 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 4
Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 100
SP165 VCSH4 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 4
Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP166 IQGH4 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 4
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
SP167 IDGH4 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 4
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
SP168 to SP169 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP170 VGHP5 Speed loop gain
proportional item for position control mode 5
Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1).
DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
SP171 VGHI5 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 5
Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1).
DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP172 VGHD5 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 5
Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1).
DEC 15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP173 HPYV5 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 5
Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1).
DEC 50 % 0 to 100
SP174 VCGH5 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 5
Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 100
SP175 VCSH5 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 5
Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP176 IQGH5 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 5
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
SP177 IDGH5 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 5
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
SP178 to SP179 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP180 VGHP6 Speed loop gain
proportional item for position control mode 6
Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1).
DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
SP181 VGHI6 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 6
Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1).
DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP182 VGHD6 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 6
Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1).
DEC 15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP183 HPYV6 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 6
Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1).
DEC 50 % 0 to 100
Pos
ition
con
trol
SP184 VCGH6 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 6
Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 100
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 29
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
SP185 VCSH6 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 6
Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP186 IQGH6 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 6
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
SP187 IDGH6 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 6
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
Pos
ition
con
trol
SP188 to SP189 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP190 to SP191 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP192 FNC0 STP function
selection Select the Z phase signal output from the CN8 No. 4 pin (SYZ) and No. 14 pin (SYZ*).
Setting value "0": Output the Z phase of the detector used for orientation. (Output the magnetic sensor's linear zone signal when using a magnetic sensor.)
Setting value "4": Output the PLG's Z phase signal only during magnetic sensor orientation. When using other orientation detectors, the output is the same as when "0" is set.
DEC 0 -32778 to 32777
SP193 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP194 SE2R Excessive speed
deviation 2 detection range
Set the range for detecting the excessive speed deviation 2 alarm as a ratio in respect to the command speed. Note that even if the ratio is less than 45r/min at the motor speed, the alarm will be detected at 45r/min. Set "0" to invalidate this function.
DEC * 0 % 0 to 100
SP195 SE2T Excessive speed deviation 2 detection time
Set the time to output the excessive deviation 2 alarm after the difference of the speed command and actual speed exceeds the above SP194 (SE2R) setting value. The alarm will be output instantly if "0" is set.
DEC * 0 ms 0 to 3000
SP197 to SP199 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP200 VGHP7 Speed loop gain
proportional item for position control mode 7
Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 7. The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1).
DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
SP201 VGHI7 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 7
Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 7. The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1).
DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
SP202 VGHD7 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 7
Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 7. The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1).
DEC 15 1/10rad/s 0 to1000
SP203 HPYV7 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 7
Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 7. The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1).
DEC 50 % 0 to 100
SP204 VCGH7 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 7
Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 7. The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 100
SP205 VCSH7 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 7
Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 7. The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP206 IQGH7 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 7
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 7. The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
Oth
ers
SP207 IDGH7 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 7
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 7. The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1).
DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 30
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG Standard
setting Unit Tolerable setting range
SP208 to SP224 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP225 OXKPH Fixed control
constant This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570
SP227 OXKPL Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570
SP227 OXVKP Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570
SP228 OXVKI Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570
SP229 OXSFT Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 370 /4097°
0 to 2048
SP230 to SP241 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP242 Vavx Fixed control
constant This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 r/min 0 to 32777
SP243 UTTM Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 ms 0 to 1000
SP244 OPLP Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 1/4097 0 to 4097
SP245 PGHS Fixed control constant
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified.
DEC * 0 0 to 1
SP247 to SP248 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP249 SMO Speedometer full
scale voltage output speed
Set the motor speed at which to output the speedometer's full scale voltage. The speed set in SP017 (TSP) is applied when "0" is set.
DEC * 0 r/min 0 to 32777
SP250 LMO Load meter output full scale adjustment 2
Set the full scale voltage for the load meter output. Approx. 10V will be output when "0" is set.
DEC * 0 V 0 to 10
SP251~SP252 Not used. Set "0". 0 SP253 DA1NO D/A output
channel 1 data number
Set the output data No. for the 1st channel (CN9 - pin 9) of the D/A output function. Always set this to "0".
DEC * 0 –32778 to 32777
SP254 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data number
Set the output data No. for the 2nd channel (CN9 - pin 19) of the D/A output function. Always set this to "0".
DEC * 0 –32778 to 32777
SP255 DA1MP D/A output channel 1 magnification
Set the output magnification of the 1st channel (CN9 -pin 9) of the D/A output function. Always set this to "0".
DEC * 0 1/257-fold –32778 to 32777
SP257 DA2MP D/A output channel 2 magnification
Set the output magnification of the 2nd channel (CN9 -pin 19) of the D/A output function. Always set this to "0".
DEC * 0 1/257-fold –32778 to 32777
SP257 to SP320
RPM to BSD
Motor constants (H)
Set this parameter in the following cases. 1) When using the standard motor with the wide range
output specifications and base slide function (when SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "0", and SP035(SFNC3)-bit0 or bit2 is set to "1"), set the values from SP314 (SPO) to SP320 (BSD).
2) When using the 1-amplifier 2-motor function, and when using a general-purpose motor for the sub-motor (when SP033 (SFNC1)-bit 2 is set to "1", and SP034 (SFNC2)-bit1 is set to "1"), set the values from SP301 (NPM) to SP311 (NEV3).
3) When using a special motor without coil changeover (electronic output changeover) specifications (when SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "1" and bit2 is set to "0"), set the values from SP257 (RPM) to SP320 (BSD).
4) When using the coil changeover (electronic output changeover) specifications motor (when SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "1", and bit2 is set to "1"), set the H coil (high-speed output) motor constants in SP257 (RPM) to SP320 (BSD).
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi, and must not be changed by the user.
HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
Mot
or c
onst
ants
SP321 to SP384
RPML to BSDL
Motor constant (L) Set this parameter when using the coil changeover motor (electronic output changeover motor). (When SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "1" and bit2 is set to "1".) Set the L coil (low-speed output) motor constants for the coil changeover motor (electronic output changeover motor). This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi, and must not be changed by the user.
HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 31
(2) Details of bit correspondence parameters No. Abbrev. Details TYP
SP033 SFNC1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0 poff hzs ront pycal pyoff sftk dflt la2m HEX setting
[1a2m] 1-amplifier 2-motor function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [dflt] Default motor (0: Main/1: Sub) [sftk] FR-TK unit validity (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [pyoff] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [pycal] Loss reduction function during high-speed rotation (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [ront] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [hzs] Motor zero speed high-speed detection (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [poff] CV contactor holding at TOSNUC power OFF (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Note) Set the special function to "0" unless instructed by Mitsubishi.
SP034 SFNC2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0 mkc2 mkch invm mts1 HEX setting
[mtsl] Motor constant (0: Standard/1: Special) [invm] General-purpose motor function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [mkch] Coil changeover function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [mkc2] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Note) Set the special function to "0" unless instructed by Mitsubishi.
SP035 SFNC3 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0 lbsd hbsd lwid hwid HEX setting
[hwid] High-speed coil wide range outputting (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [lwid] Low-speed coil wide range outputting (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [hbsd] High-speed coil base sliding (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [lbsd] Low-speed coil base sliding (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 32
No. Abbrev. Details TYP
SP037 SFNC4 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0 dslm dssm enc2 enc1 mag2 mag1 plg2 plg1 HEX setting
Set the control method for when using the 1-amplifier 2-motor function [plg1] Motor 1 PLG (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [plg2] Motor 2 PLG (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [mag1] Motor 1 magnetic sensor (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [mag2] Motor 2 magnetic sensor (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [enc1] Motor 1 encoder (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [enc2] Motor 2 encoder (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [dssm] Speedometer output (0: Output/1: Do not output) [dslm] Load meter output (0: Output/1: Do not output)
SP037 SFNC5 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0 splg dplg ospcl noplg nsno nosg plgo mago enco HEX setting
Set the orientation position detector, etc. [enco] Encoder (1024p/rev) orientation [mago] Magnetic sensor orientation [plgo] Motor built-in encoder (PLG) orientation
Note: Do not set two or more of bits 0 to 2 to "1" simultaneously. [nosg] No-signal detection type (0: Constant monitor/1: Only during orientation) [nsno] No-signal detection (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [noplg] Constant monitoring of PLG Z phase no-signal (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [ospcl] Orientation changeover speed limit value (0: Motor end/1: Spindle end) [dplg] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [splg] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Note) Set the special function to "0" unless instructed by Mitsubishi.
SP038 SFNC7 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0 oplp lmx iqsv dcsn lmnp vfbs orm tdn plg2 alty HEX setting
[alty] Decelerate to stop at alarm (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
... Only for specific alarms [plg2] A and B phase pulse output (CN8) signal 2-fold (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
... Excluding during encoder orientation [tdn] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [orm] Orientation start memo (0: Invalid/1: Valid) ... Refer to Note 1. [vfbs] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [lmnp] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [dcsn] Dual cushion during acceleration (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [iqsv] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [lmx] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [oplp] Open loop operation (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Note) Set the special function to "0" unless instructed by Mitsubishi.
Note 1) When validated, if orientation is executed after the power is turned ON or after stopping from the second or following orientation after coil changeover, the operation will stop within one rotation. Note that this applies when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
1) Encoder (1024p/rev) or PLG orientation specifications 2) Gear ratio 1:1 with no gear transmission 3) Orientation rotation direction is PRE mode 4) Orientation changeover speed limit value SP005 (OSP) setting is "0"
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 33
No. Abbrev. Details TYP
SP097 SPECO F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0 ostp orze ksft gcgh zdir vg8x mdir fdir oscl pyfx dmin odi2 odi1 HEX setting
[odi1] Set the orientation rotation direction with a 2-bit combination. [odi2] 0: Previous (orientation from direction rotating in speed control) 1: Orientation from motor forward run direction 2: Orientation from motor reverse run direction 3: Setting prohibited [dmin] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [pyfx] Variable excitation rate minimum value 50% during orientation stop
(0: Invalid/1: Valid) [pyfx] Speed clamp during indexing (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [fdir] Encoder detector polarity (0: (+)/1: (–)) [mdir] Magnetic sensor detector polarity (0: (+)/1: (–)) [vg8x] Speed gain scale 1/8-fold at torque limit input ON during orientation stop
(0: Invalid/1: Valid) [zdir] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [gcgh] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [ksft] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [orze] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) [ostp] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Note) Set the special function to "0" unless instructed by Mitsubishi.
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 34
(3) Details of drive unit capacity, motor type and power supply type selection No. Abbrev. Details TYP
Select the capacity of the drive unit in use. Setting value Drive unit type
0000 – 0001 MDS-C1-SPT-075 0002 MDS-C1-SPT-15 0003 MDS-C1-SPT-22 0004 MDS-C1-SPT-37 0005 MDS-C1-SPT-55 0007 MDS-C1-SPT-75 0007 MDS-C1-SPT-110 0008 MDS-C1-SPT-150 0009 MDS-C1-SPT-185 000A MDS-C1-SPT-220 000B MDS-C1-SPT-260 000C MDS-C1-SPT-300 000D MDS-B-SPT-370 000E MDS-B-SPT-450 000F MDS-C1-SPT-04
0010 MDS-B-SPT-550
SP039 ATYP
HEX setting
Set the motor being used. This parameter is valid only when SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 = "0". Note 1) The setting value is the same even when "M" (PLG with Z phase) is attached to the
end of the following motor model. Note 2) Even if "Z" (high-speed specifications) is attached to the end of the following motor
model, the setting value is the same if the maximum rotation speed is less than that indicated below. If the maximum speed is higher than the following values, the special motor setting SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 must be set to "1", and values must be set in SP257 (RPM) to SP320 (BSD).
Setting value Motor type Maximum speed
(rpm) Corresponding drive unit type
0000 0001 SJ-2.2A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-22 0002 SJ-3.7A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-37 0003 SJ-5.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-55 0004 SJ-7.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-75 0005 SJ-11A 7000 MDS-C1-SPT-110 0007 SJ-15A 7000 MDS-C1-SPT-150 0007 SJ-18.5A 7000 MDS-C1-SPT-185 0008 SJ-22A 4500 MDS-C1-SPT-220 0009 SJ-27A 4500 MDS-C1-SPT-260 000A SJ-30A 4500 MDS-C1-SPT-300 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F 0010 0011 SJ-N0.75A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-075 0012 SJ-N1.5A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-15 0013 SJ-N2.2A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-22 0014 SJ-N3.7A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-37 0015 SJ-N5.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-55 0017 SJ-N7.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-75 0017 0018 0019 001A 001B SJ-J2.2A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-22 001C SJ-J3.7A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-37 001D SJ-J5.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-55
001E SJ-J7.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-75
SP040 MTYP
HEX setting
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 35
No. Abbrev. Details TYP
Select the capacity of the power supply unit to be used. Setting value Power supply unit model
0000 No connection 0004 MDS-C1-CV-37 0007 MDS-C1-CV-55 0008 MDS-C1-CV-75 0011 MDS-C1-CV-110 0015 MDS-C1-CV-150 0019 MDS-C1-CV-185 0022 MDS-C1-CV-220 0026 MDS-C1-CV-260 0030 MDS-C1-CV-300 0137 MDS-C1-CV-370 0145 MDS-B-CVE-450
0155 MDS-B-CVE-550
SP041 PTYP
Note 1) Always set "0" for the drive unit which is not connected to the power supply unit.
(When three or more spindle drive units are connected to one power supply unit.)
Note 2) Set "0037" when connecting only a SPT-300 or smaller capacity drive unit to CV-370.
Note 3) When using external emergency stop value, add 40 to the above setting value. Example) Set as follows when using external emergency stop with
CV-260: 0026 + 0040 = 0066
HEX setting
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 36
(2) D/A output functions (a) Outline
The D/A output function is mounted in the standard system in the MDS-C1-SP. Using this D/A output function, the drive unit status and each data can be confirmed.
(b) Hardware specifications
2 channels 8 bit 0 to +10V Output pin CH 1: CN9-9 pin
CH 2: CN9-19 pin GND: CN9-1.11 pin (c) Parameters
Set the data No. and output magnification of each channel according to the parameters below.
Name Details SP253 D/A channel 1 data No. SP254 D/A channel 2 data No. SP255 D/A channel 1 output magnificationSP256 D/A channel 2 output magnification
(d) Output data No.
Set the No. of the data to be output in SP253 and SP254. A correlation of the output data and the data No. is shown below.
CH1 CH2 No. (setting value) Output data Units Output data Units
0 Speedometer output Maximum speed at 10V Load meter output
120% load at 10V
2 Current command When the actual data is 4096, the current command data is regarded as 100%.
3 Current feedback When the actual data is 4096, the current feedback data is regarded as 100%.
4 Speed feedback Actual data r/min 6 Position droop low-order 7 Position droop high-order
Interpolation units (When the actual data is 23040000, the position droop data is regarded as 360°.)
8 Position F T low-order 9 Position F T high-order
Interpolation units/NC communication cycle
10 Position command low-order 11 Position command
high-order
Interpolation units (When the actual data is 23040000, the position command data is regarded as 360°.)
12 Feedback position low-order 13 Feedback position
high-order
Interpolation units (When the actual data is 23040000, the feedback position data is regarded as 360°.)
80 Control input 1 81 Control input 2 82 Control input 3 83 Control input 4
Bit correspondence
84 Control output 1 85 Control output 2 86 Control output 3 87 Control output 4
Bit correspondence
Same as CH1
(Note) The % of the current command and current feedback indicate 30min. rating = 100%.
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 37
(e) Setting the output magnification Set the output magnification in SP255 and SP256.
DATA = actual data ×
Using the expression above, (i) Output data other than speedometer output and load meter output carries out the D/A output
in Fig. 1. (ii) Speedometer output data and load meter output data carries out the D/A output in Fig. 2.
DATA
0 +127
+10V
+5V
0V-128
DATA0 +127
+10V
+5V
0V
+255 (Example 1) Current command, current feedback The data is regarded as 100% when the actual data is 4096. Therefore, for example, the actual data is output as shown below during +120% current
feedback.
Actual data = 4096 × 1.2 = 4915
If "256" is set (magnification 1) in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output voltage will be as shown below, exceeding the D/A output voltage maximum value.
5V + 4915 × 1 × (5V/128) = 197V > 10V
Therefore, if "6" is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), the D/A output voltage will become as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible.
5V + 4915 × 6/256 × (5V/128) = 9.5V < 10V
SP255 or SP256256
Fig. 2Fig. 1
D/A output voltage D/A output voltage
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 38
(Example 2) Speed feedback Data unit is r/min. Therefore, at +2000r/min, the motor speed will be output as "2000". If "256" (magnification 1) is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output voltage will be as shown below, exceeding the D/A output voltage maximum value.
5V + 2000 × 1 × (5V/128) = 83.125V > 10V
Therefore, if "16" is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), the D/A output voltage will become as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible.
5V + 2000 × 16/256 × (5V/128) = 9.88V < 10V
(Example 3) Position droop
The data unit is r/min. Data is regarded as 100% when the actual data is 4096. Therefore, for example, the actual data is output as shown below during the +0.1° position droop.
Actual data = 0.1 × 23040000/360 = 6400
If "256" (magnification 1) is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output voltage will be as shown below, exceeding the D/A output voltage maximum value.
5V + 6400 × 1 × (5V/128) = 255V > 10V
Therefore, if "5" is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), the D/A output voltage will become as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible.
5V + 2000 × 5/256 × (5V/128) = 9.88V < 10V
(Example 4) Confirm the orientation complete signal (ORCF) with the control output 4L.
The data unit is bit corresponding data. Refer to the Instruction Manual for the meanings of the control output 4L bit corresponding signals. The orientation complete signal (ORCF) corresponds to the control output 4L/bit 4. Therefore, for example, the actual data is output as shown below when ORCF= ON.
bit 4 corresponding actual data = 24 = 16
If "256" is (magnification 1) set in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output voltage will be as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible.
5V + 16 × 1 × (5V/128) = 5.625V < 10V
Note that, if bits other than bit4 are ON, the current of that bit will be added to the 5.625V shown above, and at the actual ORCF signal measurement will be as shown below, so confirm the changed voltage.
(5.625 V – 5V) = 0.625 V
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 39
3.3 Spindle specification parameters screen
The spindle parameters are divided into those transmitted to the spindle drive unit from the NC and those used on the NC side.
(1) Parameters transmitted to the spindle drive unit from the NC
The 384 parameters shown in section "4.2.(1)" are those transmitted from the NC to the spindle drive unit.
(2) Parameters used on NC side
Refer to the Toshiba Machine "TOSNUC 888.2" Instruction Manual for details on the parameters used on the NC side.
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 40
3.4 Spindle monitor screen Refer to the Toshiba Machine "TOSNUC 888.2" Specifications Manual for details on this screens and contents.
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 41
3.5 Control input signals
(1) Speed command input
Max. speed
Speed command value
(a) When the speed command value is 0, the motor speed will be 0; and when the speed command value is the maximum value, the motor speed will be the maximum motor speed set in parameter SP017 (TSP).
(b) The motor will forward run and reverse run with the forward run and reverse run start commands. (The motor will not rotate with only the speed command value.)
(2) Forward run start command (SRN)
(a) When SRN is ON, the motor will run in the counterclockwise direction (CCW) from the shaft side according to the commanded speed.
(b) When SRN is OFF, the motor will decelerate to a stop, the transistor base interception will be carried out and the motor will stop.
(c) The orientation movement will be a priority when the orientation command is input.
(3) Reverse run start command (SRI) (a) When SRI is ON, the motor will run in the clockwise direction (CW) from the shaft side
according to the commanded speed. (b) When SRI is OFF, the motor will decelerate to a stop, the transistor base interception will be
carried out and the motor will stop. (c) The orientation movement will be a priority when the orientation command is input.
(4) Torque limit 1, 2, 3 input (TL1, TL2, TL3)
(a) The torque limit will temporarily reduce the motor output torque during mechanical spindle orientation or gear shift, etc., and will rotate the motor.
(b) The following seven torque limit values can be used according to the combination of the TL1, TL2 and TL3 bit inputs.
TL3 TL2 TL1 Torque limit value 0 0 1 Torque limit value (%) set with parameter SP021 0 1 0 SP049 0 1 1 SP050 1 0 0 SP051 1 0 1 SP052 1 1 0 SP053 1 1 1 SP054
(Note) % indicates the percentage to the motor 30 min. rating torque.
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 42
(5) Orientation start command input (ORC) (a) This is the orientation movement start signal. When ORC is ON, the orientation will start
regardless of the operation command (SRN, SRI). (b) When ORC is OFF, the motor will start rotating at the commanded speed again if either
forward run (SRN) or reverse run (SRI) is input. (c) The orientation movement will be a priority when the orientation command is input.
(6) Gear selection command 1, 2 input (GR1, GR2)
(a) The spindle gear step for orientation movement or various position control movements is selected.
(b) The following four gear steps can be selected according to the combination of the GR1 and GR2 2bit inputs.
(c) Do not change the signal while the orientation command or servo ON command is input.
GR2 GR1 Parameters used to set the gear ratio 0 0 SP025 (GRA1), SP029 (GRB1) 0 1 SP026 (GRA2), SP030 (GRB2) 1 0 SP027 (GRA3), SP031 (GRB3) 1 1 SP028 (GRA4), SP032 (GRB4)
(7) Index forward run command input (WRN), reverse run command input (WRI)
(a) This is the command input for forward run index or reverse run index during multipoint orientation. This will be valid only when the orientation start signal is ON.
(b) The forward run index will start from the CCW direction from the motor shaft end and the reverse run index will start from the CW direction.
(8) L coil selection command input (LCS)
(a) This is the command input signal for selecting the low-speed coil or high-speed coil when changing the coils.
(b) The high-speed coil is selected when LCS is OFF, and the low-speed coil is selected when LCS is ON.
(9) Sub-motor selection command input (MS)
(a) This is the command input signal for selecting the main spindle motor or sub general-purpose motor during the 1-drive unit 2-motor specifications changeover.
(b) The main motor is selected when MS is OFF, and the sub-motor is selected when MS is ON.
(10) Cutting input (G1) This signal determines whether cutting is being performed during C-axis control. The operation will be determined as cutting when G1 is ON.
(11) Spindle control mode selection command 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 input (SC1, SC2, SC3, SC4, SC5)
The operation mode during spindle drive unit position control is selected with the bits. The selections shown below are used.
SC5 SC4 SC3 SC2 SC1 Operation mode 0 1 0
~ 0 0
0 1 0 1 1 Synchronous tap operation mode
0 1 1 ~
0 0
0 1 1 1 1 C-axis operation mode
1 0 0 ~
0 0
1 0 0 1 1 Spindle synchronous operation mode
(Note) The normal speed operation mode will be entered when bits other than the above are selected.
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 43
3.6 Control output signals
(1) Zero speed output signal (ZS) (a) ZS will turn ON if the actual motor rotation speed drops below the zero speed detection point
in regard to the stop command. (b) The signal is output when the above condition is satisfied regardless of the rotation command
(SRN, SRI). (c) The minimum output pulse width is about 200ms. (d) The zero speed detection speed is set with parameter SP018 (ZSP) in the range of 1 to
1000r/min.
Zero speed detect point: set with parameter within range from 1 to 1000r/min (standard: 50r/min, semi-standard: 25r/min)
Motor speed
Output signal
(2) Up-to-speed output signal (US) (a) US will turn ON when the actual motor rotation speed reaches ±15% of the commanded speed.
Output signal
Command speed
Detection range
(b) The signal is not output unless either SRN or SRI will turn ON. (c) The signal can be used to verify implementation of forward run (M03) or reverse run (M04)
command. (d) If the reverse run command will turn ON, the motor will start deceleration. The US signal will
turn OFF, and after confirming that the reached signal will turn ON, the reverse run command will be completed.
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 44
Forward run
Command
Reverse run
Forward run
Motor speed 0
Output signal
Reverse run
(3) Speed detection output (SD) (a) SD will turn ON when the speed drops below the speed set in parameter SP020 (SDTS). (b) The SD signal will turn ON when the motor speed's absolute value drops below the set
detection level regardless of the run command (SRN, SRI).
Speed detection levelMotor speed
Output signal
(4) Orientation complete output (ORCF) ORCF will turn ON when the spindle position is currently within the in-position range set with parameter SP004 (OINP) during orientation.
(5) Current detect output (CD)
CD will turn ON when the current value is 110% or more than the rated current.
(6) Forward run starting command output (SRNA) This is the answer output to the forward run start command input (SRN).
(7) Reverse run starting command output (SRIA)
This is the answer output to the reverse run start command input (SRI).
(8) Torque limiting 1, 2, 3 output (TL1A, TL2A, TL3A) This is the answer output to the torque limit 1, 2, 3 input (TL1, TL2, TL3).
(9) Orientation starting command output (ORCA)
This is the answer output to the orientation start command input (ORC).
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 45
(10) Gear selecting command 1, 2, 3 output (GR1A, GR2A, GR3A) This is the answer output to the gear selection command 1, 2, 3 input (GR1, GR2, GR3).
(11) Index forward run command output (WRNA), reverse run command output (WRIA)
This is the answer output to the index forward run command (WRN) and reverse run command (WRI).
(12) L coil selection command output (LCSA)
This is the answer output to the L coil selection command input (LCS).
(13) Sub-motor selection command output (MSA) This is the answer output to the sub-motor selection command (MS).
(14) Synchronous speed match output (SYSA)
SYSA will turn ON when the movement from the speed operation mode to the spindle synchronous operation mode becomes possible during spindle synchronous operation.
(15) Coil changeover output (MKC)
MKC will turn ON for a set time when changing over from the L coil to the H coil or the H coil to the L coil during coil changeover.
(16) Index positioning complete output (WRCF)
WRCF will turn ON when indexing is completed during indexing.
(17) Drive unit warning output (DWN) DWN will turn ON when any warning occurs in the spindle drive unit.
(18) Alarm output (ALM)
ALM will turn ON when any alarm occurs in the spindle drive unit.
(19) Z-phase passed output (ZFIN) ZFIN will turn ON when the Z-phase is passed for the first time after the servo will turn ON during position control.
(20) Position loop in-position output (INP)
INP will turn ON when the current position is within the in-position range set with parameters during positioning other than orientation. INP will turn OFF when the servo turns OFF.
(21) Spindle control mode selection command 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 output (SC1A, SC2A, SC3A, SC4A,
SC5A) This is the answer output to the spindle control mode selection command 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 input (SC1, SC2, SC3, SC4, SC5).
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 46
3.7 Meter outputs
SpeedometerFull scale: 10V
Load meterFull scale: 10V
(1) Speedometer output (a) The following specification is recommended for speedometer.
(i) Model : YM-8G DC voltmeter (Mitsubishi) (ii) Rating : 10VDC full scale (iii) Internal impedance : About 10kΩ
(b) +10VDC is output at the motor max speed, regardless of rotation direction.
(2) Load meter output (a) The following specification is recommended for load meter.
(i) Model : YM-8G DC voltmeter (Mitsubishi) (ii) Rating : 10VDC full scale (iii Internal impedance : About 10kΩ (iv) Scale
Max. speedMotor speed
Red zone
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 47
(b) Reading of load meter is percent (%) of load to the rated motor output. The relationship between motor output capacity [kW] and load meter reading [r/min] is as follows:
Mot
or o
utpu
t cap
acity
(kW
)
Continuous rating area
Overload zone (1 min.)
50%ED ( 15 min.30 min. ) rating
Load meter 120%
Load meter 100% Load meter
Cont. rating
30 min. rating × 100%
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
III - 48
3.8 Output interface
Open emitter output Output transistor rating M54630P TR array Tolerable voltage : 24VDC or less Tolerable current : 50mA or less (per output)
Spindle/C-axischangeover output signal
Coil changeoveroutput signal
<Spindle drive unit> <MHE90K (AD converter)>
(Note 1) Connect the spindle/C-axis changeover output signal only when using the MHE90K detector. (Note 2) The changeover circuit configuration for coil changeover is as shown below.
<Spindle drive unit> <AC spindle motor>
Control section
• The relays, contactors, cables, etc., for the spindle drive unit and AC spindle motor that are not enclosed in the bold line must be prepared by the machine manufacturer.
• The relay (RA) must be connected in parallel with the flywheel diode; and the contactors (MC1, MC2) must be connected in parallel with the CR surge absorber coil.
∗ During low-speed coil selection................ connection (Turn MC1 ON, MC2 OFF) During high-speed coil selection............... connection (Turn MC1 OFF, MC2 ON)
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 49
4. Optional Specifications and Parts WARNING
Always wait at least 15 minutes after turning the power OFF before connecting options or peripheral devices. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
Always use the designated peripheral devices and options. Failure to observe this could lead to faults or fires.
4.1 Orientation specifications (optional)
The following three types of orientation specifications are available: (1) 1-point orientation using magnetic sensor (2) 4096-point orientation using encoder (3) 4096-point orientation using motor built-in encoder
4.1.1 1-point orientation using magnetic sensor
(1) Connection Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the magnetic sensor and spindle drive unit.
(2) Magnet and detection head installation direction
The magnet and detection head should be installed in the specified orientation.
Standard type and high-speed standard type ............. The center reference hole of magnet and the reference notch of detection head
should come to the same side. Refer to CASE 1 , CASE 2 , CASE 3 and UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 1 .
High-speed small type ............. The reference notch of detection head should be positioned in reference with polarity
(N, S) of magnet. Refer to CASE 4 , CASE 5 and UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 2 .
High-speed ring type ............. The reference notch of detection head should be positioned in reference with polarity
(N, S) of magnet. Refer to CASE 6 , CASE 7 and UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 3 .
CASE 1 Magnet is installed on the circumferential surface of rotating body. (Circumferential mounting)
The reference hole of magnet and the reference notch of detection head should come to the opposite load side, as shown below.
Opposite load side
Load side
Reference notch View from "A"
Reference hole
Reference notch
Opposite load side Load side
Reference hole
Magnet is installed on circumferential surface of rotating body.
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 50
CASE 2 Magnet is installed on the front or back flat surface of rotating body. (Flat mounting) (1) When the magnet is installed on the
opposite load side of spindle, the reference hole of magnet and reference notch of detection head should face inward, as shown below.
(2) When the magnet is installed on the load side of spindle, the reference hole of magnet and reference notch of detection head should face outward, as shown below.
Reference
notch Reference hole
Referencehole
Reference notch
Referencehole View from "B"
View from "C"
Referencenotch
Reference notch
Referencehole
Magnet is installed on the opposite load side. Magnet is installed on the load side.
CASE 3 In regard to CASE 1 , the magnet and detection head can be changed to the following
position as long as the reference hole and reference notch are aligned. With this, normal orientation can be carried out.
(However, the parameter SP097 orientation detector installation direction bit must be changed in this case.)
Reference hole
Reference notch
UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 1
If the magnet reference hole and detection head reference notch are not aligned, intense vibration will occur on both ends of the magnet, and orientation is impossible.
Reference hole
Reference notch Reference notch
Reference hole
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 51
CASE 4 Magnet is installed on the circumferential surface of rotating body. (Circumferential mounting) The detection head reference notch should be on the opposite load side and the magnet
should be installed in the polarity shown below.
Opposite load side
Load side
Reference notch
View from "A"
Opposite load side Load side
Reference notch
Magnet is installed on the circumferential surface of rotating body.
CASE 5 As long as the relation between location of the detection head reference notch and the polarity of the magnet are aligned, the detection head and the magnet can be installed as shown below in CASE 4 , and normal orientation can be carried out.
(However, the parameter SP097 orientation detector installation direction bit must be changed in this case.)
Opposite load side
Reference notch
Load side
Reference notch View from "A"
UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 2
If the detection head reference notch is not aligned properly in reference to polarity of the magnet, intense vibration occurs on both ends of the magnet, and orientation is impossible.
Opposite load side
Load side
Referencenotch
View from "A"
Opposite load side
Load side
Reference notch
In this example, polarity (N, S) of magnet is inverse to that in CASE 4 .
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 52
CASE 6 The detection head reference notch is on the opposite load side of spindle and the polarity of the magnet is as shown below.
Opposite load side
Load sideReferencenotch View from "A"
Opposite load side Load side
Reference notch
CASE 7 As long as the relation between location of detection head reference notch and the polarity of the magnet are aligned, the detection head and the magnet can be installed as shown below in CASE 4 , and normal orientation can be carried out.
(However, the parameter SP097 orientation detector installation direction bit must be changed in this case.)
Opposite load side
Load side
Reference notch
View from "A"
Opposite load side Load side
Reference notch
UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 3
If the detection head reference notch is not aligned properly in reference to polarity of the magnet, intense vibration occurs on both ends of the magnet, and orientation is impossible.
Opposite load side
Load sideReference notch View from "A"
Opposite load side Load side
Reference notch
In this example, polarity (N, S) of magnet is inverse to that in CASE 4 .
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 53
Spindle
Face A
Magnet Min. gap
Direction of rotation
Tolerable installation error ±2 mm
Reference notch
Head
Adjustable range ±2 mm Mounting plate
CenterCenter
Face A
Reference notch
(40 to 60 permissible)
Magnet
Max. gap
Table 1 BKO-C1810H03 Standard BKO-C1730H06 High-speed standard
R (Radius) mm Max. gap mm Min. gap mm Max. gap mm Min. gap mm
40 11.5 ± 0.5 2.7 ± 0.5 10 ± 0.5 1.22 ± 0.5
50 9.5 ± 0.5 2.8 ± 0.5 8 ± 0.5 1.31 ± 0.5
60 8.5 ± 0.5 3.0 ± 0.5 7 ± 0.5 1.5 ± 0.5
70 8.0 ± 0.5 3.4 ± 0.5 7 ± 0.5 2.38 ± 0.5
Table 2 BKO-C1810H03 Standard BKO-C1730H06 High-speed standard
R (Radius) mm Gap mm Gap mm
40 6 ± 0.5 5 ± 0.5
50 6 ± 0.5 5 ± 0.5
60 6 ± 0.5 5 ± 0.5
70 6 ± 0.5 5 ± 0.5
Table 3 BKO-C1730H09 High-speed standard
R (Radius) mm Max. gap mm Min. gap mm
40 6.25 ± 0.5 3.3 ± 0.5
50 6.0 ± 0.5 3.7 ± 0.5
60 5.75 ± 0.5 3.85 ± 0.5
70 5.5 ± 0.5 3.87 ± 0.5
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 54
(3) Caution on installation of magnet When the magnet is installed to the spindle, pay attention to the following:
(a) Do not place an intense magnetic source near the magnet. (b) Carefully handle the magnet, avoiding mechanical shock to the magnet. (c) Secure the magnet to the spindle with M4 screws. (d) After the magnet is installed, balance the entire spindle. (e) Align the center of the magnet (between N and S) with the center line of the rotating disk on
the spindle. (The position relation should be as shown in CASE 1 to CASE 7 on the previous pages.) (f) Keep the magnet and its peripheral clean from iron particles (iron particles may cause
malfunction). (g) Apply lock paint, or other suitable means, to prevent installation screws from becoming loose. (h) If the magnet is installed on a ground rotating disk, demagnetize the disk. (i) Diameter of rotating disk on which the magnet is installed should be within the range from
80mm to 120mm. (j) If rotation speed of the spindle on which the magnet is installed exceeds 6000r/min, use a
high-speed type magnet (applicable up to 12000r/min of rotation speed). If rotation speed exceeds 12000r/min, use a ring type magnet.
(k) When installing the magnet on a rotating body plane, keep the speed below 6,000r/min.
(4) Caution on installation of sensor Observe the following cautions when installing the sensor.
(a) The position relation of the magnet and detection head should follow CASE 1 to CASE 7 . (b) The center line of detection head should be in line with the center of magnet. (c) The gap between the magnet and detection head should be as follows:
• Table 1 on previous page when using standard magnet and installation CASE 1 or CASE 3 • Table 1 on previous page when using high-speed standard magnet and installation CASE 1 or CASE 3
• Table 2 on previous page when using standard magnet and installation CASE 2
• Table 2 on previous page when using high-speed standard magnet and installation CASE 2 • Table 3 on previous page when using high-speed compact magnet and installation CASE 1 or CASE 3 • An example of the high-speed ring magnet is shown in the outline drawing in section "4.1.1 (5)".
∗ Manufacturing a jig is recommended for mass production. (d) Connector used in preamplifier BKO-C1810 : Oil proof-type BKO-C1730 : Not oil proof-type Install both type at a place not subject to oil. (e) The cable between the preamplifier and the controller should be laid down apart from
high-voltage cables. (f) Check the connector wiring, securely engage the receptacle and tighten connector lock screws.
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 55
(5) Magnetic sensor orientation parts (Optionally supplied parts) Select the combination of the magnetic sensor parts for magnetic sensor orientation from the table below.
Combination
Type Tolerable speed [r/min] Model Pre-
amplifier Sensor Magnet
Standard 0 to 6000 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1810H01 to 3 H01 H02 H03 High-speed standard 0 to 12000 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.6 H01 H02 H06 High-speed small 0 to 12000 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.9 H01 H02 H09 High-speed ring 0 to 25000 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.11 H01 H02 H41 High-speed ring 0 to 25000 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.12 H01 H02 H42 High-speed ring 0 to 30000 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.13 H01 H02 H43 High-speed ring 0 to 30000 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.14 H01 H02 H44
Outline dimensions:
Preamplifier H01
2-ø5.5 hole
Connector (sensor side) For BKO-C1810H01, R04-R-8F is used. For BKO-C1730H01, TRC116-21A10-7F is used.
Connector (controller cable side) Unit side : TRC116-21A10-7M Cable side : TRC116-12A10-7F10.5
Sensor H02
Cable length 500
Connector For BKO-C1810H02, R04-R-8M is used. For BKO-C1730H02, TRC116-12A10-7M is used.
Reference notch +100–0
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 56
Magnet Part No.
Tolerable speed [r/min] Outline drawings
H03 0 to 6000
H06 0 to 12000
Mass: 40 ± 1.5g
4-ø4.3 hole
Reference hole
Installation screw: M4
H09 0 to 12000
Mass: 14.8 ± 0.7g
2-ø4.3 hole
N.P Installation screw: M4
H41 0 to 25000
H42 0 to 25000
Gap
1 ±
0.1
Reference notch
Stop position scale
Stainless case SUS-303
Sensor head
2-øG±0.15øH On circumference
Case Cover
Spun ringRINGFEDERRFN8006 J×K
4-F screw
N
H43 0 to 30000
H44 0 to 30000
G hole
Gap L Tolerance
Cover
Case
Spindle clamping screw
Reference notch Spindle
Installation of magnet
Magnet DIM IN mm Dimensions
Model A B C D E F G H J × X L Mass (g)
BKO-C1730H11 105 70H7+0.030 –0 90 28 19 M6×1.0 5 90 70×79 1 1024±4
BKO-C1730H12 94 60H7+0.030 –0 79 25 17 M5×0.8 5 79 60×68 1 768±4
BKO-C1730H13 78 50H7+0.025 –0 66 23 15 M5×0.8 5 66 50×57 1 478±4
BKO-C1730H14 66 40H7+0.025 –0 54 20 13 M4×0.7 5 54 40×45 1 322±4
∗ Polarity (N,S) is indicated on the side wall of cover. Detection head should be installed so that the reference notch ofsensor head comes on the case side.
Caution on installation of H41 to H44 1. Tolerance to shaft dimension should be "h6". 2. 2-øG hole can be used for positioning of spindle
and magnet. 3. Magnet shall be installed as shown to the left. 4. Misalignment between sensor head and magnetic
center line shall be within ±2mm. 5. Reference notch of sensor head shall come on the
case side.
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 57
4.1.2 4096-point orientation using encoder
(1) Connection Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the encoder and spindle drive unit.
(2) Installation conditions
Mechanical characteristics for rotation
a. Inertia : 0.1×10-4kg·m2 or less b. Shaft friction torque : 0.98N·m or less c. Shaft angle acceleration : 104rad/s2 or less d. Tolerable speed : 7,030r/min
Mechanical configuration
a. Bearings : Non-lubricated for 100,000 hours or more rotations (at 2,000r/min) Non-lubricated for 20,000 hours or more at 6,000r/min b. Shaft amplitude : 0.02mm or less at 15mm from end c. Tolerable load : Thrust direction 10kg (5kg during operation) Radial direction 20kg (10kg during operation) d. Mass : 1.5kg max e. Squareness of flange to shaft : 0.05mm or less f. Flange matching eccentricity : 0.05mm or less
Working conditions
a. Working temperature range : -5°C to +55°C b. Storage temperature range : -20°C to +85°C c. Humidity range : 95% RH (at 40°C) for 8 hours d. Vibration resistance : 5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm, each shaft for 30 min. e. Impact resistance : 294.0m/s2 (30G)
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 58
(3) Handling a. Use of a flexible coupling is recommended for the coupling of the encoder and spindle shaft
in terms of improving the encoder life and performance. b. Installation precision The precision shown below should be secured for the encoder installation section engaging
section and installation surface sway in order to maximize the coupling life.
Coupling
Opposite encodershaft side
Encoder
c. Recommended coupling
Recommendation 1 Recommendation 2 Manufacturer Tokushu Seiko Eagle Model Model M1 FCS38A Resonance frequency 1374Hz 3515Hz Position detection error 0.8 × 10–3 ° 1.2 × 10–3 ° Tolerable speed 20000r/min 10000 r/min
Core deviation 0.7mm 0.16mm Mis- alignment Angle displacement 1.5° 1.5°
Max. length 74.5mm 33mm Outline dimensions Max. diameter ø57mm ø38mm
Refer to the coupling catalogue for details on the coupling.
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 59
(4) Encoder orientation parts (Optionally supplied parts) Encoder (1024p/rev)
Encoder model Tolerable speed
RFH-1024-22-1M-68 6000r/min
RFH-1024-22-1M-68-8 8000r/min Name plate 4-ø5.4 hole
Key way dimensions
Encoder side MS3102A20-29P Cable side MS3106A20-29S
1.15
3
5
ø14.
3
ø 15
g6
ø 50
g6
Pin Function Pin Function A 1chA K 0V B 2chZ L C 1chB M D N 1chA E Case earth P 2chZ F R 1chB G S H +5V T J
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 60
4.1.3 4096-point orientation using motor built-in encoder
The motor built-in encoder built-in motor with Z-phase signal is required for this specification. This can be used only when the motor and spindle coupling is the direction coupling or when the timing belt with a reduction ratio of 1 is used.
(1) Connection
Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the signal wires.
(2) Installation The encoder is built into the motor so no special detector needs to be installed.
4.1.4 Operation of orientation
(1) Operation modes There are three modes of orientation stop. Desired mode can be selected by setting parameter SPECO.
1. PRE :
........... (a) Spindle approaches the stop position in the direction of on-going rotation. 2. Forward orientation :
........... (b) Spindle approaches the stop position in forward direction of rotation, regardless of direction of on-going rotation.
3. Reverse orientation : ........... (c) Spindle approaches the stop position in the reverse direction of rotation, regardless
of direction of on-going rotation.
Speed (Fwd.)
ORC ORCF
Speed (Rev.) ORC ORCF
(2) Operation sequence (a) When orientation command ORC is given, motor speed changes from the steady run speed
to "Position loop changeover speed" and at the same time the multi-point orientation stop position is read.
(b) When motor speed reaches the "Position loop changeover speed", control mode changes from speed control to positioning control (position loop gain parameter (Note 1)).
("Position loop changeover speed" is automatically set when position loop gain is specified by parameter.)
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 61
(c) When control mode changes, distance to the orientation stop position is calculated and the motor is decelerated in the set pattern (specified by parameter CSP) to enter the orientation mode.
(d) When the spindle enters the in-position range (set by parameter OINP), "oriented spindle stop complete signal (in-position)" ORCF turns ON.
(e) The stop position zero point can be shifted by setting parameter OPST. ( f ) When orientation command (ORC) is removed, the motor is returned to the previously
specified run speed.
Motor speed
Stop positioncommand
(Note 1) PGM is used for the magnetic sensor and motor built-in encoder orientation and PGE is used for the encoder orientation.
The stopping position according to the encoder installation direction is as shown below:
Case 1 Case 2
Installation direction
Motor
Encoder
Belt
Arrow A
Arrow A
Normal orientation
Looking from arrow A
Forward run Reverse run
Looking from arrow A
Forward run Reverse run
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 62
(3) Diagram of relation of parameters for orientation
From CNC Delay advance Power
drive unit
is the parameter name.
Magnetic sensor
Bit 0 to 2Encoder
Bit 5 or bit 6
Spindle
Speed feedback Spindle motor Position feedback
Position control block Speed control block
or
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 63
4.2 Synchronous tap function (option)
There are two types of synchronous tap. • Closed type synchronous tap • Semi-closed type synchronous tap
4.2.1 Closed type synchronous tap
A position loop can be built up with position signal from an encoder installed on spindle. (Note that position control is carried out by configuring a position loop in the Toshiba Machine CNC "TUSNUC 888.2".)
(1) Connection
Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the encoder and spindle drive unit.
(2) Installation of encoder For installation of encoder, refer to the pages related to encoder orientation.
4.2.2 Semi-closed type synchronous tap
A position loop can be built up with position signal from motor built-in encoder. (Note that position control is carried out by configuring a position loop in the Toshiba Machine CNC "TUSNUC 888.2".) A special detector is not required for synchronous tap if the spindle is coupled to the motor shaft directly or through gears. (When belt or timing belt is used, closed type synchronous tap is applicable.) It is also applicable to standard motor having no Z-phase control.
(1) Connection
No additional connection is required for semi-closed type synchronous tap. 4.2.3 Operation of synchronous tap
The following two operations can be used to enter the synchronous tap operation. (1) Synchronous tap starts after zero point return (2) Synchronous tap starts after deceleration and stop
The above operations are controlled with the CNC side, so refer to the CNC Instruction Manual.
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 64
4.3 C-axis control (optional) 4.3.1 When using encoder (OSE90K+1024 BKO-NC6336H01)
(1) Connection Refer to page "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the encoder and spindle drive unit.
(2) Installation conditions
Mechanical characteristics for rotation
a. Inertia : 0.1×10–4kg·m2 or less b. Shaft friction torque : 0.98N·m or less c. Shaft angle acceleration : 105rad/s2 or less d. Tolerable speed : 7,030r/min
Mechanical configuration
a. Bearings : Non-lubricated for 100,000 hours or more rotations (at 2,000r/min) Non-lubricated for 20,000 hours or more at 6,000r/min b. Shaft amplitude : 0.02mm or less at 15mm from end c. Tolerable load : Thrust direction 10kg (5kg during operation) Radial direction 20kg (10kg during operation) d. Mass : 2kg max e. Squareness of flange to shaft : 0.05mm or less f. Flange matching eccentricity : 0.05mm or less
Working conditions
a. Working temperature range : –5°C to +55°C b. Storage temperature range : –20°C to +85°C c. Humidity range : 95% RH (at 45°C) for 8 hours d. Vibration resistance : 5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm, each shaft for 30 min. e. Impact resistance : 294.0m/s2 (30G)
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 65
(3) Handling a. Installation of encoder Use of a flexible coupling is recommended for the coupling of the encoder and spindle shaft
in terms of improving the encoder life and performance. b. Installation precision The precision shown below should be secured for the encoder installation section engaging
section and installation surface sway to secure the coupling life.
Coupling
Opposite encodershaft side
Encoder
c. Recommended coupling
Recommendation 1 Recommendation 2 Manufacturer Tokushu Seiko Eagle Model Model M1 FCS38A Resonance frequency 1374 Hz 3515 Hz Position detection error 0.8 × 10-3 ° 1.2 × 10-3 ° Tolerable speed 20000 r/min 10000 r/min
Core deviation 0.7 mm 0.16 mm Mis- alignment Angle displacement 1.5° 1.5°
Max. length 74.5 mm 33 mm Dimensions Max. diameter ø57 mm ø38 mm Refer to the coupling catalogue for details on the coupling.
d. Cable
1) Consider the following points to allow the encoder to be used to its fullest. A 4.5V or higher power supply must be secured for the encoder. For example: (i) Increase the +5V, 0V wire size. (ii) Use two or more wires for +5V, 0V. (iii) Keep the cable length as short as possible.
2) Others
The encoder is a precision device so do not apply strong impact, etc., to it. Incorrect wiring will cause trouble. Always confirm the connector name and pin No., etc., before wiring.
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 66
(4) C-axis control parts (Optionally supplied parts) Encoder OSE90K+1024 BKO-NC7337H01
4-M4 depth 6 Caution plate
Connector key wayConnector
3
5
Signal Generated signals Remarks
1ch 1024 C/T A • B-phase, A •B -phase 2ch 1 C/T Z-phase • Z -phase 3ch 90000 C/T C • D-phase, C •D -phase 4ch 1 C/T Y-phase • Y •B-phase
Connector pin assignment
Pin Function A 1ch A-phase B 2ch Z-phase C 1ch B-phase D —— E Case grounding F 3ch C-phase G 3ch D-phase
H +5V DC +5% –10%
J 0V
Grounding plate and cable clamp fittings Refer to "5.4 Single parts (optionally supplied parts)".
Main unit side : MS3102A20-29P Controller cable side : MS3102A20-29S (The connector on the controller cable side must be
prepared by the user.)
Pin Function K 0V L 3ch C -phase M 3ch D -phase N 1ch A -phase P 2ch Z -phase R 1ch B -phase S 4ch Y-phase T 4ch Y-phase
Note 1. The max. encoder speed must be 6000r/min or less.Note 2. The dimensional tolerance that is not specified is
±0.5mm.
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 67
4.3.2 When using built-in encoder (MBE90K)
Refer to the MBE90K (built-in C-axis encoder) Specifications and Instruction Manual [BNP-A2993-41]. 4.3.3 When using built-in encoder (MHE90K)
Refer to the MHE90K (built-in C-axis encoder) Specifications and Instruction Manual [BNP-A2993-44].
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 68
4.4 Single parts (optionally supplied parts) 4.4.1 Power step-down transformer
When available power supply is at 400V, use this optional step-down transformer. (1) 12-23kVA (ITEM1 to 3)
Name Plate
4-M5 Thread
DIA Hole : 62
Earthing Terminal Bolt Size : M6
Name Plate Terminal Board
Ventilation Window (With Right & Left, Backside)
Lifting Eye Bolt
Setting Base (DIA Holes "M12K")
Front Cover (Removable)
HV & LV Terminal Bolt Size : M8
Dimensions Mass ITEM
Capacity (kVA) A (kg)
Remarks
1 12 230 90 7.5K 2 17 175 115 11K 3 23 215 130 15K
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 69
(2) 30kVA to 75kVA (ITEM4 to 8)
HV Terminal Bolt Size : G
LV Terminal Bolt Size : G
Name Plate
Lifting Eye Bolt
Earthing Terminal (Bolt Size : M16)
Terminal Board
4-M5 Thread
Terminal Window
Cover For Connecting Terminal (Removable)
Setting Base (DIA Hole "M12")
Dimensions ITEM Capacity (kVA) A B C D E F G
Mass (kg) Remarks
4 30 535 395 625 460 250 445 M12 165 18.5K 5 37 535 395 665 460 250 485 M12 185 22K, 26K 6 44 535 425 665 460 265 485 M12 205 30K 7 60 625 425 815 540 255 625 M16 280 37K 8 75 625 425 840 540 270 650 M16 320 45K
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 70
4.4.2 Noise filter
(1) Selection If radio noise must be reduced, select a noise filter from the following table according to the power supply unit model:
MDS-C1-CV- Noise filter name (Tohoku Kinzoku) 37 LF-330 55 LF-340 75 LF-350 110 LF-360
150, 185 LF-380K 220, 260, 300 Two LF-380K units in parallel
(2) Noise filter installation position Insert the noise filter in the unit input.
Power supply unit
(MDS-C1-CV)Noise filter
∗ Connect to the transformer input in power supply units that use the transformer.
Power distribution box
CB
Power supply
(3) Specifications
Name Rated voltage AC/DC (V)
Rated current AC/DC (A)
Tested voltage AC 1 min. (V) Between case
terminals
Insulation resistance
(MΩ) 500VDC
Leakage current (mA)
250V 60Hz
Working temperature range (°C)
330 200V 30A 1500 > 300 < 1 –20 to +55 340 200V 40A 1500 > 300 < 1 –20 to +45 350 200V 50A 1500 > 300 < 1 –20 to +45 360 200V 60A 1500 > 300 < 1 –20 to +45
380K 200V 80A 2000 > 300 < 5 –25 to +55
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 71
(4) Shape and dimensions
LF-300 Series
IN rating nameplate
Part name A B C D E F G H I
LF-330 180 170 60 29 120 135 150 35 65 LF-340 180 160 50 30 200 220 240 40 80 LF-350 180 160 50 30 200 220 240 40 80 LF-360 200 180 60 30 300 320 340 50 100
(mm)
LF-K Series
Name Terminal plate A B C D E F G H LF-380K TE-K22 M6 670 400 560 380 500 170 9×6.5ø 6.5ø
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 72
4.5 Other optional specifications
Refer to the following optional specifications for each model shown below for optional specifications not explained in this manual.
Title of optional specifications Specifications No.
(1) MDS-B/C1-SP Series coil changeover function optional specifications BNP-A2993-23
4. Optional Specifications and Parts
III - 73
4.6 Theoretical acceleration and deceleration times
In the calculation described below, load torque is assumed to be zero. Therefore, acceleration and deceleration times determined here somewhat differ from actual acceleration and deceleration times.
(1) Definition
N (r/min)
P0
(Note) 1) "P0" is (Rated power × 1.2). Example : For spindle of 2.2/3.7kW, P0 = 3700 × 1.2 = 4440 (W)
2) GD2 = (Motor GD2) + (Motor shaft conversion load GD2) (kg·m2)
(2) Acceleration/deceleration time "t" (a) Constant torque zone
t1 = 1.03 × GD2 × N12
375 × P0 (s)
(b) Constant output (power) zone
t2 = 1.03 × GD2 × (N22 – N12) 2 × 375 × P0
(s)
(c) Reduced output zone
t3 = 1.03 × GD2 × (N33 – N23) 3 × 375 × P0 × N2
Therefore, acc./dec. time t (0 → N3) is, t = t1 + t2 + t3 (s)
Unit conversion :
Speed : 1r/min = 2π60 rad/s
Output (power) : 1kW = 1/1.3596HP
Formula :
P = ωT0 = (2π N60 ) × T
P : Output [W] ω : Angular velocity [rad/s] T0 : Torque [N·m] N : Speed [r/min] T : Torque [N·m]
Example: GD 2L = 0.123kg·m2
For motor SJ-N3.7A From specification 2, GD 2
M = 0.021kg·m2 thus, GD2 = 0.021 + 0.123 = 0.144 kg·m2
t1 = 1.03 × 0.144 × 15002
375 × 3700 × 1.2 = 0.200 (s)
t2 = 1.03 × 0.144 × (60002 – 15002) 2 × 375 × 3700 × 1.2 = 1.503 (s)
t3 = 1.03 × 0.144 × (80003 – 60003) 3 × 375 × 3700 × 1.2 × 6000 = 1.465 (s)
Acc./dec. time for 0 → 8000r/min t = 0.200 + 1.503 + 1.465 = 3.168 (s)
IV. Maintenance
MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section
1. Starting up the System
IV - 1
1. Starting up the System 1.1 Startup procedures
WARNING 1. Provide Class 3 grounding or higher for the spindle amplifier and spindle motor. 2. Do not operate the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.3. Do not turn the power ON with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged
sections will be exposed, and could result in electric shocks. 4. Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this
could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION 1. Correctly connect the spindle amplifier and spindle motor power phases (U, V, W). Failure to do
so could result in abnormal operation of the spindle motor. 2. Apply only the designated voltage on each terminal. Failure to observe this could result in
ruptures or faults. 3. Turn the spindle amplifier power OFF if the spindle amplifier fails. Fires could start if a large
current continues to flow. 4. Cut off the power with the error signal. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and
ignite due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc. 5. Check each parameter before starting operation. Unpredictable movements could result
depending on the machine. 6. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor unit and spindle motor, etc., will be hot
during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns.
The procedures for starting up the entire system are explained in this section. Refer to each Unit Section for details on adjusting the individual units. (1) Connect the units as shown in the connection drawing. (Refer to I. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System
Configuration Section, 4. Connection of Each Unit.) Observe the precautions given on pages i to v and Chapters I to III when installing each unit and motor.
(2) Set each unit's rotary switch. (3) Check the wiring and input voltage, etc. Turn the power ON with READY OFF or in the emergency
stop state, and confirm that each unit's LED display is correct. (Refer to the next page.) (4) Check the personal computer or spindle drive unit LED to confirm that the parameters are set as
specified. (Refer to III. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section, 3. Status Display and Parameter Settings, etc., for details on the parameter meanings and setting methods.)
(5) Release the emergency stop, turn READY ON, and make adjustments according to each Unit Section.
* Setting the rotary switch
1) (a) Power supply unit Setting 0: Contactor installed
1: Contactor not installed (b) Resistance regeneration converter unit
Always set "0". 2) Spindle drive unit Usually set to "0" when starting up.
1. Starting up the System
IV - 2
1.2 Status display with 7-segment LED The status can be displayed on the 7-segment LED on the power supply and spindle drive unit when the power is turned ON.
MDS-A/B-CVpower supply unitMDS-A-CR Resistance regeneration type power supply
24VDC ON (3ø 200/230VAC is ON only when using resistance regeneration converter)
MDS-A/B-SPA spindle drive unit
3ø 200/230VAC ON
Initializing Initializing
Waiting for READY ON
Alarm No. display at alarm occurrence
READY ON
READY ON
Waiting for READY ON Emergency
stop
Waiting for servo ON
Servo ON
Normal operation
Reset
Normal operation
Reset or emergency stop
Alarm display during alarm (When the parameter error AL37 occurs, the alarm No. and parameter No. are displayed.)
2. Adding and Replacing Units and Parts
IV - 3
2. Adding and Replacing Units and Parts
WARNING Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the CHARGE lamp on the power supply unit has turned OFF before adding or replacing units and parts. Failure to observe this could result in spindle amplifier damage or electric shock faults.
CAUTION 1. Correctly transport the product according to its mass. Failure to observe this could result in injury.2. Do not stack the product above the indicated limit. 3. Install the product on non-combustible material. Installation directly on or near combustible
materials could result in fires. 4. When installing, always observe this manual and install on a place which can withstand the mass.5. Do not get on the product, or place heavy objects on it. Failure to observe this could result in
injury. 6. Use the product within the designated environment conditions. 7. Do not allow conductive matters such as screws or metal pieces, or combustible matters such as
oil enter the spindle amplifier or spindle motor. 8. Do not block the spindle amplifier or spindle motor’s intake/outtake ports. Failure to observe this
could result in faults. 9. The spindle amplifier and spindle motor are precision devices. Do not drop them or apply strong
impacts. 10. Do not install or operate a spindle amplifier or spindle motor that is damaged or missing parts. 11. Consult with the Service Center or Service Station when storing the spindle amplifier for a long
time. 2.1 Replacing the unit
CAUTION 1. Do not hold the front cover when transporting the spindle amplifier. The amplifier could drop and
cause injury. 2. Always observe the installation direction. Failure to do so could result in faults. 3. Provide the specified distance between the spindle amplifier and inner surface of the control
panel and between other devices. Failure to do so could result in faults. 4. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot during
operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns.
Replace the units with the following procedures. 1) Replacing the power supply unit.
(a) Disconnect the connectors connected to CN4 and 9. (b) Disconnect each wire connected to L1, L2, L3, , L+, L–, L11, L21 and MC1 on the terminal
block. (c) Remove the two screws fixing the unit onto the control panel, and remove the unit from the
control panel. (d) Install the new unit following the reversal procedures in reverse. (e) Check the rotary switch settings.
2. Adding and Replacing Units and Parts
IV - 4
2) Replacing the resistance regeneration converter (a) Disconnect the connectors connected to CN4 and 22. (b) Disconnect each wire connected to L1, L2, L3, , L+, L-, C, MC1 and MC2 on the terminal
block. (c) Remove the two (four) screws fixing the unit onto the control panel, and remove the unit from
the control panel. (d) Install the new unit following the reversal procedures in reverse. (e) Check the rotary switch settings.
3) Replacing the spindle drive unit
(a) Save the parameters for the fault drive unit with a personal computer, or write the parameters for the faulty amplifier in the Appendix 1 Parameter Setting list.
(b) Disconnect the connectors connected to CN4, 5, 6, 8A, 9A, 10, 11 and 12. (c) Disconnect the wires connected to U, V, W, , L+, L–, L11 and L21 on the terminal block. (d) Remove the two (four) screws fixing the unit onto the control panel, and remove the unit from
the control panel. (e) Install the new unit following the reversal procedures in reverse. (f) Set the parameters, and adjust the speed, speedometer and load meter. When using magnetic
sensor orientation, confirm and adjust the orientation stop position. Note) Install the same type of unit as the faulty unit. For the spindle drive unit, make sure that all parts,
including the options, are the same type.
2. Adding and Replacing Units and Parts
IV - 5
[Appearance drawing] 1) Power supply unit 2) Spindle drive unit
CHARGE lamp CHARGE lamp CHARGE lamp
B-CV-220 to 300 C1-CV-220 to 370
B-CV-37 to 185 C1-CV-37 to 185
B-SPT-220 to 300 C1-SPT-220 to 370
B-SPT-04 to 185C1-SPT-04 to 185
2. Adding and Replacing Units and Parts
IV - 6
2.2 Unit fan
The fan life is approximately five years under normal conditions (the life is affected by the usage state and environment). Use the following procedure to replace the fan.
(1) MDS-B Series [Replacement method]
1. Turn the 200/230VAC input power's NF OFF, wait for the power supply unit's CHARGE lamp to go out, and then remove the unit.
2. Remove the two installation screws on the bottom of the cooling fins. 3. Disconnect the connectors from the back of the unit, and replace the fan.
Remove these two screwsDisconnect the connector from the units
(2) MDS-C1 Series [Replacement method]
1. Turn the 200/230VAC input power's NF OFF, wait for the power supply unit's CHARGE lamp to go out, and then remove the unit.
2. Remove the fan guard from the back of the unit, and remove the two fan installation screws. 3. Remove the rubber bushing from the fan drive wire, and pull out the connected connector. 4. Disconnect the connected connector, and replace the fan.
Remove these two screws
Remove the rubber bushing Pull out the connected connector, and disconnect the connector
3. Daily Maintenance
IV - 7
3. Daily Maintenance
WARNING 1. Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the CHARGE
lamp on the power supply unit (resistance regeneration converter unit) has turned OFF before starting maintenance or inspections. Failure to observe this could result in spindle amplifier damage or electric shock faults.
2. Only qualified technician must carry out the maintenance and inspections. Work carried out by other personnel could result in electric shocks. Contact your nearest Service Center or Service Station for repairs and part replacement.
3.1 Maintenance tools
Notice Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) on the spindle amplifier.
(1) Measuring instruments The following measuring instruments are required to confirm that the power is correctly supplied to the spindle amplifier, and that the spindle amplifier is correctly wired, etc.
Instrument Condition Tester Check that the wires to the spindle amplifier are
correctly wired before turning the power ON. Oscilloscope Use for general-purpose measurements and
troubleshooting AC voltmeter Measure the AC power
voltage. Tolerable difference is ±2% or less.
Measure the AC power voltage supplied to the spindle amplifier.
DC voltmeter Maximum scale 10V, 30V, 450V Tolerable difference is ±2% or less.
Use to measure the DC power voltage and voltage across PN.
Note) A digital voltmeter may be used instead of the AC voltmeter, DC voltmeter and tester.
(2) Tools
Screwdrivers (Phillips: large, medium, small, flat-tip: small) 3.2 Periodic inspections
The unit is a stationary type, but the unit's built-in fan and additional cooling fan must be inspected periodically. The spindle motor does not required maintenance. However, periodically check that there is no abnormal noise, abnormal vibration or clogging at the motor cooling fan, etc.
3. Daily Maintenance
IV - 8
Recommended periodic inspection items
Item Inspection frequency Inspection details Remedies
Cooling fan (unit built-in fan), and Additional cooling fan (outside unit)
Monthly 1. Does the fan rotate lightly by hand? 2. Does the fan rotate correctly when
the power is turned ON? 3. Is the fan contaminated with dirt or
oil? 4. Is there any abnormal noise from the
bearings?
Clean or replace the fan
1. Are any of the screws loose? Tighten the screws Terminal block screws Periodically2. Are any of the screws contaminated
with dirt or oil? Clean
1. Are any cables damaged or nicked, etc.?
Replace the cable Cable and connector Periodically
2. Are any connectors loose? Tighten the connectors
Noise/ vibration
Monthly Is there any abnormal noise or vibration?
Temperature Monthly Is the motor's bearings or frame hot when touched?
Insulation Twice/year Is the insulation resistance 1MΩ or more when measured with a 500V megger tester? (Disconnect any wires connected to the spindle drive unit before measuring.)
Motor
Cooling fan Monthly 1. Does the fan rotate correctly when the power is turned ON?
2. Is the fan contaminated with dirt or oil?
3. Is the finger guard clogged with dirt or oil?
4. Is there any abnormal noise from the bearings?
Clean or replace the fan, or clean the finger guard
4. Maintenance Parts
IV - 9
4. Maintenance Parts
No. Part Type Applicable unit
Manu- facturer Quantity
Replace-ment
interval Remarks
B-CV-37 55 75
VFA-4018-BH20 BKO-NC6855H01
B-SPT-22 37
VFA-8018-BH20 BKO-NC6855H02
B-SPT-55 75 110 (new type) B-CV-110 S80D22-TW
BKO-NC6855H11 B-SPT-110 (old type) B-CV-150 185
S92B22-TW BKO-NC6855H12
B-SPT-150 185 B-CV-220 260 300
S12D22-TW BKO-NC6855H13
B-SPT-220 260 300
Style Electronics 1
C1-CV-150 185 1
C1-CV-220 260 300 370
2
MMF-09C24TS- RN4 BKO-NC533H14
C1-SP/H-150 185 220 260S 300S
2
C1-CV-110 1 C1-SP/H-55 75 110 150S
2
MMF-06F24ES- RN5 BKO-NC5332H12
C1-SP/H-260 300 4
1
Fan (built into unit)
MMF-04C24DS- ROE BKO-NC5332H11
C1-SP/H-22 37
Melco Technorex
2
5 years
The fan life will vary according to the usage environment and conditions. * The additional
cooling fan is prepared by the manufacturer.
2 AC reactor B-AL-7.5K -11K -18.5K -30K -37K
– Mitsubishi Electric
Depends on system configuration
At fault
3 Contactor Depends on power supply unit
– Mitsubishi Electric
Depends on system configuration
At fault
4 NFB Depends on power supply unit
– Mitsubishi Electric
Depends on system configuration
At fault
5. Selection of Leakage Breaker
IV - 10
5. Selection of Leakage Breaker As a PWM-controlled higher harmonic chopper current flows into the spindle motor, the leakage current is higher than a motor operated with commercial power. When installing a leakage breaker as indicated below, make sure to ground both the drive unit and motor.
Machine power distribution box
Inverter device 2
Inverter device 1 Motor
MDS spindle system
200/230VAC
The commercial frequency element of the leakage current in the MDS-B Series spindle system is approx. 6mA per spindle motor. However, when selecting the leakage breaker, calculate this as max. 15mA per spindle motor in consideration of the motor power cable length, distance from grounding and motor size, etc. If other inverter devices are connected on the same power line, consider the leakage current for these devices when selecting the leakage breaker, and install these at the section shown with A above. Note that a leakage breaker (inverter compatible) that removes the higher harmonic elements with a filter and detects only the leakage current in the commercial frequency range (approx. 50 to 60Hz) must be selected. Incorrect operations may take place if a breaker that is too sensitive to the higher harmonic elements is used.
(Note) When there is one spindle, and the total current leakage of devices on the same power line is
7mA 15mA + 7mA = 22mA
Select the leakage breaker so that this calculated value is within the rated non-operating sensitivity current.
When using a leakage tester to check faults such as malfunctioning of the leakage breaker, select a tester that is not easily affected by the higher harmonics, and set the measurement range to 50 to 60Hz.
Example) SOUKOU Electric LC-30F (Note) Always ground the machine with Class 3 or higher grounding for safety purposes.
6. Noise Filter
IV - 11
6. Noise Filter
If noise is a problem, especially with AM radio broadcasts, due to the electromagnetic wave noise generated from the motor and spindle drive unit, install radio noise filter to reduce the noise. Use this filter as needed. Refer to III. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section, "4.4.2 Noise filter" for details on the selection method, installation position and outline, etc.
V. Maintenance
MDS-B-CVE/MDS-C1-CV Power Supply Section
1. Troubleshooting
V - 1
1. Troubleshooting
1.1 Status display
WARNING 1. Provide Class 3 grounding or higher for the spindle amplifier and spindle motor. 2. Do not touch the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.3. Do not operate the unit with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged
sections will be exposed, and can cause electric shocks. 4. Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this
could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION 1. Check and adjust each program and parameter before starting operation. Failure to do so could
lead to unforeseen operation of the machine. 2. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot
during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns.
The power supply unit's status is displayed on the power supply unit's 7-segment LED. When an alarm occurs, the alarm No. is displayed on the 7-segment LED of the spindle drive unit connected with the communication cable (CN4). (1) 7-segment display
The power supply unit's status is displayed with the 7-segment LED on the top of the power supply unit. The alarm code flickers when an alarm or warning occurs. The display is not an alarm if it is not flickering.
7-segment display Details
b Ready OFF Until the emergency stop is canceled after 200VAC (24VDC) is turned ON.
C Servo OFF Changes to display d approx. one second after emergency stop is canceled.
d Servo ON Indicates that the emergency stop is canceled and operation is possible.
* : Flicker Indicates that an alarm or warning is occurring. (Note) Alarm display code (This display code differs from the alarm No.)
1. Troubleshooting
V - 2
[Operation] a: The base interception is carried out for the spindle drive unit, the external contactor turns OFF, and the spindle motor coasts to a stop.
b: Only a warning is displayed. Operation continues. [Resetting methods] AR : Reset by turning the power supply unit power OFF and ON. PR : Reset by turning the NC power OFF and ON. NR : Reset with the NC reset key.
List of power supply alarms and warnings
Model displaying alarms Alarm
No.
LED dis- play B-CV C1-CV
Meaning Detection timing Ope- ration
Resetting method
61 1 Power module overcurrent Always after power ON a PR 62 2 Frequency error Always after power ON a PR 63 3 Auxiliary regeneration error Always after power ON a PR 64 4 Not used 65 5 Rush relay error At Ready OFF → Ready ON a PR 66 6 Not used 67 7 Open phase At Ready OFF → Ready ON a PR 68 8 Watch dog Always after power ON a AR 69 9 Ground fault At Ready OFF → Ready ON a PR 6A A Contactor melting During Ready OFF a PR 6B b Rush relay melting During Ready OFF a PR 6C c Main circuit error At Ready OFF → Ready ON a PR 6E E Memory error Immediately after power ON a AR
6F F A/D converter error/ Power supply error
Immediately after power ON/ always a AR
70 G Not used
71 H Instantaneous stop/ External emergency stop During Ready ON a NR
72 i Not used
73 J Over-regeneration Always after power ON a PR (Note 1)
75 L Overvoltage Always after power ON a NR (Note 2)
76 M External emergency stop setting error At power ON a AR
77 N Power module overheat Always after power ON a AR
E8 O Auxiliary regeneration frequency over Always after power ON b –
E9 P Instantaneous warning During Ready ON b –
EA Q External emergency stop input At power ON b –
EB R Over-regeneration warning Always after power ON b –
(Note 1) Alarm "73" occurs to prevent operation from being resumed immediately after an over-regeneration state. Thus, it cannot be reset unless 15 minutes or more have passed from the start of the control current (L11, L21) after the alarm occurs. Immediately after the alarm occurs, it cannot be reset even if the NC power or control power is turned OFF and ON. If the power is turned ON again after the alarm occurrence, wait at least 15 minutes in the power ON state, and then turn it ON again.
(Note 2) The voltage across L+ and L- is higher than the power voltage immediately after alarm "75" occurs. If the alarm is reset in this state, other alarms could occur.
Wait at least 5 minutes after alarm "75" occurs before resetting it.
1. Troubleshooting
V - 3
1.2 Troubleshooting according to power supply alarm
CAUTION To reset the alarm, remove the cause, confirm that the run signal is not input and ensure the surrounding safety. Then, reset the alarm and resume operation.
If an alarm occurs in the spindle amplifier, the base interception will be carried out and the motor will coast to a stop. Set an external sequence that turns the power OFF. To reset the alarm, remove the cause, and then turn the power OFF and ON or turn the alarm reset signal ON and OFF. (1) Alarm No. 61 Power module overcurrent
[Meaning] An overcurrent was detected in the power supply's
power module. [Detection] Always after power ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies
The alarm occurs each time immediately after 200VAC is turned ON and the servo is turned ON.
Replace the unit.
The alarm occurs frequently during servo ON. The alarm occurs when the motor is decelerating.
Investigate item 3, and take measures.
1 Check the state of the operation when the alarm occurs, and check the repeatability.
The alarm occurs after continuous operation for a long time. The unit is hot.
Investigate item 2, and take measures.
The total of all motor loads exceeds the power supply rated capacity.
Lower the motor load and operation frequency.
2 Check the load state of all motors, and the starting/stopping frequency.
The total does not exceed the capacity. Investigate item 3, and take measures.Investigate whether the power is correct.
(1) Is the specified power capacity ensured?
The power capacity is insufficient. Increase the power capacity.
The voltage drops below 170V. Increase the power capacity. (2) Using a tester, check whether the voltage is 170V or more even during motor acceleration/deceleration.
The voltage is 170V or more. Investigate item (3), and take measures.
(3) Monitor the power voltage with an oscilloscope (also during acceleration/deceleration).
1. Voltage waveform distortion
2. When there is a local drop
3. Other waveform or frequency
abnormality
Eliminate the wave distortion. 1. Increase the power capacity, or
increase the power cable size. 2. Improve the other semiconductor
device in which waveform distortion is occurring.
(Additionally install an AC reactor, etc.)
Using a tester, measure the voltage across the R-S, S-T and T-R wires.
The voltage difference across each wire is 10V or more.
Improve the power phase balance.
3
Nothing applies. Investigate item 4, and take measures.The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates.
Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left.
4 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area? No problem. Replace the unit.
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
1. Troubleshooting
V - 4
(2) Alarm No. 62 Frequency error
[Meaning] The input power frequency exceeded the specified range.
[Detection] Always after power ON Investigation details Investigation results Remedies
The alarm occurs each time immediately after the power is turned ON. The alarm occurs occasionally regardless of the operation state.
Investigate item 2. 1 Check the state of the operation when the alarm occurs, and check the repeatability.
The alarm occurs only while the motor is accelerating/decelerating.
Investigate item 3.
The frequency is deviated from 50Hz±3% or 60Hz±3%. The frequency deviates from 50Hz±3% or 60Hz±3% in some cases due to a fluctuation in frequency.
Review the power facilities.
The voltage waveform dips at some sections.
Take measures for the problem causing power unit or device. (Add an AC reactor, etc.)
The frequency is 50Hz±3% or 60Hz±3%. Replace the unit.
2 Measure the power voltage during normal operation.
No problem. Investigate item 4. The frequency greatly fluctuates during acceleration/deceleration.
Review the power facilities.
The voltage waveform during deceleration dips in some section.
Take measures for the problem causing power unit or device. (Add an AC reactor, etc.)
3 Measure the power voltage during motor acceleration/deceleration.
No problem. Investigate item 4. The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates.
Provide noise measures for the devices causing the problem on the left.
4 Investigate the installation environment.
No problem. Replace the unit.
(3) Alarm No. 63 Auxiliary regeneration error
[Meaning] The auxiliary regenerative resistor in the power supply stays ON.
[Detection] Always after power ON Investigation details Investigation results Remedies
Cutting oil or oil mist is adhered on the regenerative resistance unit.
Take measures so that cutting oil and dust do not contact the fins on the back of the unit. Then, investigate item 2, and take measures.
1 Check whether the regenerative resistance unit on the back of the unit is dirty.
The resistor is not dirty. Replace the unit. There is continuity. Replace the unit. 2 Using a tester, confirm the conductivity
between the terminal unit (L+, L–, L1, L2, L3) and resistor surface.
The resistance value is ∞. Clean the resistor or fins, and take measures so that oil and dust do not come in contact. Monitor the state. If the alarm recurs, replace the unit.
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
1. Troubleshooting
V - 5
(4) Alarm No. 65 Rush relay error
[Meaning] The relay for the rush resistance short-circuit in the power supply does not turn ON.
[Detection] At Ready OFF → Ready ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies The alarm occurs each time READY is turned ON.
Replace the unit. 1 Investigate the repeatability.
The alarm occurs occasionally. Investigate item 2, and take measures.The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates.
Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left.
2 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area?
No problem. Replace the unit.
(5) Alarm No. 67 Phase failure
[Meaning] One-phase of the 3ø 200VAC input is not connected [Detection] At Ready OFF → Ready ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies There are phases with no voltage. Correctly supply the power. 1 Using a tester, check the voltage of
each input phase. All phases are normal. Investigate items 3 and 4 for alarm 71 (instantaneous power failure).
(6) Alarm No. 68 Watch dog
[Meaning] The power supply software process did not end
within the specified time. [Detection] Always after power ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies The alarm occurs each time READY is turned ON.
Replace the unit. 1 Investigate the repeatability.
The alarm occurs occasionally. Investigate item 2. The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates.
Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left.
2 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area?
No problem. Replace the unit.
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
1. Troubleshooting
V - 6
(7) Alarm No. 69 Ground fault
[Meaning] Motor ground fault [Detection] At Ready OFF → Ready ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies 100kΩ or less. Motor fault or cable ground fault.
Replace the motor or cable. 1 Using a megger tester, measure the
insulation between the UVW terminals and grounding of all motors. 100kΩ or more. Investigate item 2, and take measures.
Oil has come in contact. Take measures so that oil does not come in contact. Clean the motor's cannon connector and the inside of the terminal box. Monitor the state. If the alarm recurs, investigate item 3 and take measures.
2 Does oil come in contact with motor or cable?
Oil has not come in contact. Investigate item 3, and take measures.
1MΩ or less. Replace the motor or cable. 3 Measure the insulation again.
More than 1MΩ Replace the unit.
(8) Alarm No. 6A External contactor melting
[Meaning] The external contactor turned ON even when Ready was OFF.
[Detection] During Ready OFF
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies A contactor is not installed externally. Set the power supply rotary switch
(SW1) to 1. 1 Is a contactor installed externally?
A contactor is installed externally. Investigate item 2, and take measures.Alarm 6A occurs. Investigate item 3, and take measures.2 Is the contactor melted?
Disconnect the contactor excitation wire, and start up.
Alarm 6A does not occur. Investigate item 4, and take measures.
An error is occurring. Remove the cause of the alarm on the driver side, and then replace the contactor.
3 Does an error (power module error, etc.) occur on the driver side before alarm 6A?
An error is not occurring. Replace the contactor. The connection is incorrect. Wire correctly as shown below.
Power supply
EMG switch, etc.
4 Is the contactor exciting wire correctly passed through the MC1-L11 terminals?
The connection is correct. Replace the unit.
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
1. Troubleshooting
V - 7
(9) Alarm No. 6B Rush relay melted
[Meaning] The relay for the rush resistance short-circuit in the power supply stays ON.
[Detection] During Ready OFF
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies The alarm occurs each time the power is turned ON.
Investigate item 3, and take measures.1 Investigate the repeatability.
The alarm occurs sometimes. Investigate item 2, and take measures.The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates.
Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left.
2 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area?
No problem. Replace the unit.
An error is occurring. Remove the cause of the alarm on the driver side, and then replace the power supply unit.
3 Does an error (power module error, etc.) occur on the driver side before alarm 6B?
An error is not occurring. Replace the unit.
(10) Alarm No. 6C Main circuit error
[Meaning] The charging operation to the main circuit is not correct.
[Detection] At Ready OFF → Ready ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies The CHARGE lamp remains ON for some time.
Replace the unit.
The lamp turns ON instantly, but when the alarm occurs and the contactor turns OFF, the lamp turns OFF immediately.
Investigate item 2, and take measures.
1 Check the CHARGE lamp ON state when the alarm occurs.
The lamp never turns ON. Investigate item 2, take measures, and then replace the unit.
(1) The power supply unit side is abnormal.
Replace the unit.
(2) The spindle drive unit side is abnormal. Review the PN wiring, and investigate the spindle drive unit.
2 Disconnect the L+ and L- terminal block wiring, and check the following resistance value with a tester.
L L+
Spindle drive unit (1)
Spindle drive unit (2)
Power supply unit
(2)
(1)
Disconnect only power supply's L+ and L- wires. Using a tester, measure the resistance value at (1) and (2).
(1) and (2) are both normal.
Tester measurement point
+ -
Correct resistance
value Faulty
L+ L- Approx. 100Ω
Short-circuit or infinite Power supply
side L- L+ Infinite Short-circuit or
several 100Ω
L+ L- Approx. 100Ω
Short-circuit or infinite Spindle drive
side L- L+ Infinite Short-circuit or
several 100Ω
Replace the unit.
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
1. Troubleshooting
V - 8
(12) Alarm No. 6E Memory error
[Meaning] Abnormality in power supply memory circuit [Detection] Immediately after power ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies The alarm occurs each time READY is turned ON.
Replace the unit. 1 Investigate the repeatability.
The alarm occurs occasionally. Investigate item 2, and take measures.The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates.
Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left.
2 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area?
No problem. Replace the unit.
(13) Alarm No. 6F A/D converter error/Power supply error
[Meaning] Abnormality in power supply's A/D converter, or spindle drive unit detected an abnormality in the power supply.
[Detection] Immediately after power ON (A/D converter abnormality)/always (power supply abnormality)
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies
"F" is flickering. A/D converter abnormality. Use the same remedy as the alarm 6E memory error.
Another alarm code is flickering. Refer to the section for each alarm. 0 stays displayed Investigate item 2, and take measures.F stays displayed Investigate item 2, and take measures.8 stays displayed Refer to the alarm 68 watch dog alarm
item. b, c and d stay displayed Investigate item 3, and take measures.
1 Check the power supply's 7-segment LED display.
Something else is displayed. Use the same remedy as the alarm 68 watch dog alarm.
For MDS-A-CV: 0 or 1 For MDS-B-CV: 0, 1, 4, 5 For MDS-A-CR: 0
Replace the unit. 2 Check the rotary switch settings.
A value other than the above is set. Correctly set the rotary switch. The wiring is incorrect. The cable is not shielded.
Replace the cable. 3 Check the wiring of the driver communication cable.
The wiring is OK. Investigate item 4, and take measures.OK after replacement. Cable fault 4 Try replacing the communication cable
connected with the driver. NG even after replacement. Replace the unit.
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
1. Troubleshooting
V - 9
(14) Alarm No. 71 Instantaneous power failure/ external emergency stop
[Meaning] The external contactor turned OFF. An instantaneous power failure occurred for 25ms or longer.
[Detection] During Ready ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies The contactor is OFF. The power supply operates normally.
Check the machine sequence. When directly turning OFF the contactor with the emergency stop button and NC emergency stop is applied simultaneously with the contactor OFF, emergency stop will occur instead of an alarm.
1 Investigate the sequence to check whether the contactor has been turned OFF with an emergency stop button, etc.
The contactor is not OFF. Investigate item 2, and take measures.The alarm occurs each time READY is turned ON.
Investigate item 3, and take measures.
The alarm occurs at a certain operation. Investigate item 1 again. If there is no abnormality, investigate item 3.
2
Investigate the state of occurrence.
The alarm occurs sometimes during operation. (With no regularity)
Investigate item 4, and take measures.
The wiring or sequence is abnormal. Correct the state explained on the left.3 Is the RST wiring correct? Is the contactor's wiring sequence correct? There is no problem. Investigate item 4, and take measures.
An instantaneous power failure or voltage drop occurs frequently.
Review the power facility. 4 Monitor the power waveform with an oscilloscope.
There is no problem. Replace the unit.
(15) Alarm No. 73 Over-regeneration
[Meaning] The regenerative resistor's load exceeded the tolerable value.
[Detection] Always after power ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies The alarm occurs when the motor is not rotating after power ON.
Check for power fluctuation, the ground connection and for the effect of noise. If there is no abnormality, replace the unit.
The alarm does not occur when the acceleration/deceleration frequency is reduced.
Investigate items 2 and following. If there is no problem, reduce the acceleration/deceleration frequency.
1 Investigate the state of alarm occurrence.
Other than the above. MDS-A-CR: Investigate item 2 and take measures.
MDS-B-CV: Investigate item 3 and take measures.
The type is incorrect. (Refer to the alarm "6D" parameter setting.)
Correctly set and then check again. 2 CR only
Check that external regenerative resistor type is set correctly with the parameter (PTYP) for the drive unit connected to the power supply unit. Check that the rotary switch is set to "0". * The switch may be set to "2" for
special specifications.
The setting is correct. Investigate item 3, and take measures.
3 Confirm that the alarm "75" investigate items 3 and following and the regenerative resistance value, etc., are correct.
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
1. Troubleshooting
V - 10
(17) Alarm No. 75 Overvoltage
[Meaning] The voltage across PN exceeded 410V. [Detection] Always after power ON.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies The alarm occurs each time the motor decelerates.
Investigate item 4, and take measures.
The alarm occurs each time in a specific deceleration mode.
Investigate item 3, and take measures.
1 Check the state of alarm occurrence.
The alarm occurs occasionally. Investigate item 2, and take measures.E0 is output just before the overvoltage. (Over-regeneration warning)
Investigate item 3, and take measures.2
If possible, monitor the 7-segment display.
Others. Investigate item 3, and take measures.The regeneration load increases when several axes are decelerated simultaneously.
Reduce the frequency of simultaneous deceleration.
3 Monitor the operation of each axis when the alarm occurs. (When multiple spindle drive units are connected to one converter.) Other than the above. Investigate item 4, and take measures.Check whether the power is correct. (1) Is the specified power capacity
secured? The power capacity is insufficient. Increase the power capacity.
The voltage drops below 170V. Increase the power capacity. (2) Using a tester, check that the voltage is 170V or more even during motor acceleration/deceleration.
The voltage is 170V or more. Carry out item (3).
(3) Monitor the power voltage with an oscilloscope (also during acceleration/deceleration).
1. Voltage waveform distortion
2. When there is a local drop
3. Other waveform or frequency
abnormality
Eliminate the wave distortion. 1. Increase the power capacity, or
increase the power cable size. 2. Improve the other semiconductor
device in which waveform distortion is occurring.
(Additionally install an AC reactor, etc.)
Using a tester, measure the voltage across the R-S, S-T and T-R wires.
The voltage difference across each wire is 10V or more.
Improve the power phase balance.
4
No abnormality is found in particular. Investigate item 5, and take measures.An instantaneous power failure or voltage drop occurs frequently.
Review the power facility. 5 Monitor the power waveform with an oscilloscope.
There is no problem. Investigate item 6, and take measures.The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates.
Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left.
6 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area?.
No problem. Replace the unit.
The correct value is not set. Correctly set. 7 If the alarm occurs when the motor is decelerating from speed of 8000rpm or more, check the spindle parameters (SP067, SP068, SP069). When using special motor constants, check the (SP270 to SP273) setting values.
The correct value is set. Change the setting values as explained for SP067 to SP069. Try increasing the SP270 to SP273 setting values by two to three fold. Try setting the SP276 and SP277 setting values to 0.
The correct value is not set. Correctly set. 8 If the alarm occurs the instant that the motor starts accelerating or decelerating, check the spindle parameter (SP046) value.
The correct value is set. Set a value between 1 and 8 in SP046. (Setting 1 is the most effective.)
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
1. Troubleshooting
V - 11
(18) Alarm No. 76 External emergency stop setting error
[Meaning] The rotary switch setting and parameter (PTYP) setting do not match.
[Detection] Always after power ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies When not using external emergency stop:1. The rotary switch is set to 4 or 5. 2. The parameter (PTYP) is set between
**40 and **79.
1. Set the rotary switch to 0 or 1. 2. Set the parameter (PTYP) between
**00 and **39. When using the external emergency stop:1. The rotary switch is set to 0 or 1. 2. The parameter (PTYP) is set between
**00 and **39.
1. Set the rotary switch to 4 or 5. 2. Set the parameter (PTYP) between
**40 and **79.
1 Check the rotary switch setting and the parameter (PTYP) of the drive unit connected to the power supply unit.
The setting combination is correct. Replace the unit.
(19) Alarm No. 77 Power module overheat
[Meaning] Overheating of the power supply's power module (IPM) was detected.
[Detection] Always after power ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies Check the heat radiating environment. (1) Rotation of the fan on the back of
the unit The fan is not rotating correctly. Replace the fan.
(2) Contamination of heat radiating fins on back of unit.
The heat radiating fins are heavily contaminated with cutting oil and dust, etc.
Clean the fins.
Take measures so that cutting oil and dust do not get on the fins.
(3) Measure the unit's ambient temperature
The temperature exceeds 55°C Consider means to ventilate and cool the panel.
1
Nothing applies. Investigate item 2, and take measures.The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates.
Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left.
2 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area? No problem. Replace the unit.
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
1. Troubleshooting
V - 12
1.3 Power supply warning
The power supply warning is displayed only on the power supply unit's 7-segment LED and is not displayed on the spindle drive unit's 7-segment LED. Operation can be continued after the warning, but it does indicate that there is a factor for an alarm.
(1) Alarm history display E0 Auxiliary regeneration frequency over LED display
[Meaning] This indicates that the instantaneous regeneration
energy is high, and regeneration with just the power regeneration is not sufficient. The auxiliary regeneration has also functioned, and regeneration at the auxiliary regeneration capacity limit is occurring frequently. The auxiliary regeneration does not operate when this warning occurs, so an overvoltage alarm could occur.
[Detection] During ready ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies 1 Inspect items 3 and following for alarm
75 overvoltage.
(2) Alarm history display E9 Instantaneous power failure warning LED display
[Meaning] An instantaneous power failure occurred for 25ms or
longer. An alarm did not occur because the main circuit voltage did not drop. This may cause an instantaneous power failure alarm, overvoltage alarm or power module error.
[Detection] During ready ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies 1 Inspect items 3 and following for alarm
71 instantaneous power failure.
(3) Alarm history display EA External emergency stop input LED display
[Meaning] The external emergency stop signal was input, or
24V is not applied on the CN23 connector. [Detection] Always after NC power ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies 1 When not using the external
emergency stop: Check the rotary switch and parameter (PTYP) settings
External emergency stop is enabled in the settings.
Invalidate the settings. Refer to investigation item 1 for alarm 76.
24V is applied on the CN23 connector. Replace the unit. 2 When using external emergency stop: • Check the CN23 connector voltage 24V is not applied on the CN23 connector. Investigate item 3. (1) Check whether the CN23
connector or cable is disconnected.
The connector or cable is disconnected or sometimes comes loose.
Replace the cable. 3
(2) Check the external emergency stop switch's contact
The contact is faulty or is faulty sometimes. Replace the switch.
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
1. Troubleshooting
V - 13
(4) Alarm history display EB Over-regeneration LED display
[Meaning] 80% of the over-regeneration alarm level was reached.
[Detection] During Ready ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies 1 Investigate the items for alarm 73
over-regeneration.
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
VI. Maintenance
MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section
1. Adjustment Procedures
VI - 1
1. Adjustment Procedures
WARNING 1. When adjusting the drive unit with a personal computer, some parameters will be validated as
soon as they are changed. Take special care when making adjustments while rotating the spindle, and take care not to approach body parts near the spindle. Failure to observe this could result in personal injury.
2. When monitoring the state of the spindle or spindle motor with a personal computer, if the spindle motor’s maximum speed is set to 33000r/min or more, the spindle motor speed displayed on the personal computer will be half of the actual speed. Failure to note this could result in spindle damage or personal injury.
CAUTION 1. Do not make extreme adjustments or changes to the parameters as the operation could
become unstable.
Note 1) SP*** (***) in the following explanations refers to the spindle parameter number and abbreviation.
Note 2) Refer to III. Spindle Drive Unit Section, 4.4 for details on setting the parameters.
1.1 Starting up (1) Confirm that the type of motor and spindle amplifier to be used are as ordered. (2) Confirm that the set spindle parameters (SP001 to SP384) match the setting list. Especially, confirm the following parameters well.
(a) SP017 (TSP) Spindle motor maximum speed (b) SP034 (SFNC2) Spindle motor special settings (c) SP039/040 Spindle amplifier/motor type (d) SP257 to SP384 Spindle motor special constants (e) CNC side spindle related parameters (Refer to the Toshiba Machine CNC "TOSNUC 888.2"
Instruction Manual.) (3) When using the built-in motor, adjust the speed detector's waveform according to the procedures
given in the built-in motor specifications. To start open loop operation, set the SP038 (SNFC6) bit F to "1" and turn the drive unit power ON
again. After completing the adjustments, return the setting to "0", and turn the power ON again.
1.2 Confirming the speed loop
1.2.2 Adjusting and confirming the motor (spindle) speed The speed command is digitally input from the CNC, so there are no sections to be adjusted on the spindle amplifier side. Check the following items. Couple the spindle motor with the machine, and check the machine running-in state and the control state.
(1) Do the command speed and actual speed match? (2) Is the rotation smooth? (3) Is there any abnormal noise? (4) Is there any abnormal odor? (5) Is the bearing temperature abnormal?
Run the motor with an actual load, and confirm that there are no abnormalities.
1. Adjustment Procedures
VI - 2
1.2.3 Adjusting the deceleration time Connect a waveform recorded between the indicator's speedometer output (CN9A - pin 9) and analog common (CN9A - pin 1), and measure the acceleration/deceleration time. If the deceleration time is much longer than the acceleration time, refer to section III-45 and 46, and adjust the deceleration time. (Applicable parameters) Following two parameters
SP087 (DIQM)SP088 (DIQN)
Note) If the deceleration time is too small, an alarm such as AL32 (power module overcurrent) or
AL75 (overvoltage) could occur. Set the deceleration time so that it is 95% or more of the acceleration time.
1.3 Adjusting the orientation
1.3.1 Operation The following three types of orientation stop can be used. Select the method with SP097 (SPEC0). 1. PRE ･････････････････････(a) Orients from the current rotation direction. 2. Forward run orientation ･････(b) Always orients from the forward run direction. 3. Reverse run orientation･････(c) Always orients from the reverse run direction.
Speed (forward run)
Speed (forward run)
1.3.2 Operation sequence 1) When the orientation start command turns ON during motor rotation, the motor speed changes from
the operation speed to the position loop changeover speed. The multi-point orientation stop position command is read in at the same time.
2) When the position loop changeover speed is reached, the control changes from speed control to position control.
(The position loop changeover speed is automatically determined from the position loop gain (Note 1).)
3) When the control changes, the distance to the orientation stop point is calculated. The motor decelerates to a stop following a set deceleration pattern ( SP006 (CSP) ), and then enters the orientation stop state.
4) When the in-position range ( SP004 (OINP) ) is entered, the orientation complete signal turns ON. 5) The stop position zero point movement is carried out with SP007 (OPST). 6) When the orientation start command is canceled, the motor returns to the rotation direction and
speed command issued at that point.
1. Adjustment Procedures
VI - 3
Motor speed
Orientation start command
12-bit multi-point orientationcommand
Gear selection command
(Note 1) Position loop gain parameters
Motor built-in encoder orientation, magnetic sensor orientation: SP001 (PGM) Encoder orientation (1024p/rev) : SP002 (PGE)
1.3.3 Encoder orientation/motor built-in encoder orientation stop position The stop position is as follows according to the encoder installation direction.
Case 1 Case 2
Inst
alla
tion
dire
ctio
n
Encoder
Belt
Arrow A
Motor
Arrow A
Nor
mal
orie
ntat
ion Forward run Reverse run
View from arrow A
Forward run Reverse runView from arrow A
(Note) Case 1 applies for the motor built-in encoder orientation.
1. Adjustment Procedures
VI - 4
1.3.4 Diagram of orientation parameter relation
Position control block Speed control block
Parameter names are enclosed in a box.
From NC
OrDelay/advance Power
amplifier
Position feedbackSpeed feedback Spindle
motor
Bit 5 or Bit 6
Bits 0 to 2
Encoder
Magnetic sensor
Spindle
1.3.5 Preparation for motor built-in encoder orientation adjustment [Related parameters]
Parameter No. Abbrev. Name Default value
SP001 PGM Position loop gain for magnetic sensor, motor-built-in encoder orientation 100SP004 OINP Orientation in-position width 16SP005 OSP Orientation changeover speed limit value 0SP006 CSP Deceleration rate at orientation 20SP007 OPST Orientation position shift amount 0SP025 GRA1 Number of spindle side gear teeth 1 1SP026 GRA2 Number of spindle side gear teeth 2 1SP027 GRA3 Number of spindle side gear teeth 3 1SP028 GRA4 Number of spindle side gear teeth 4 1SP029 GRB1 Number of motor side gear teeth 1 1SP030 GRB2 Number of motor side gear teeth 2 1SP031 GRB3 Number of motor side gear teeth 3 1SP032 GRB4 Number of motor side gear teeth 4 1SP097 SPECO Orientation specifications 0000SP098 VGOP Speed loop gain proportional item for orientation 63SP099 VGOI Speed loop gain integral item for orientation 60SP100 VGOD Speed loop gain delay/advance item for orientation 15SP105 IQGO Current loop gain magnification for orientation 1 100SP106 IDGO Current loop gain magnification for orientation 2 100SP107 CSP2 Orientation deceleration rate 2 0SP108 CSP3 Orientation deceleration rate 3 0SP109 CSP4 Orientation deceleration rate 4 0SP119 MPGH Orientation position loop gain H coil compensation magnification 0SP120 MPGL Orientation position loop gain L coil compensation magnification 0SP121 MPCSH Deceleration rate H coil magnification for orientation 0SP122 MPCSL Deceleration rate L coil magnification for orientation 0
[Preparation] 1) Confirm that the parameters are set as shown above.
1. Adjustment Procedures
VI - 5
1.3.6 Preparation for encoder orientation adjustment [Related parameters]
Parameter No. Abbrev. Name Default value
SP002 PGE Position loop gain for encoder orientation 100SP004 OINP Orientation in-position width 16SP005 OSP Orientation changeover speed limit value 0SP006 CSP Deceleration rate at orientation 20SP007 OPST Orientation position shift amount 0SP025 GRA1 Number of spindle side gear teeth 1 1 to 32767SP026 GRA2 Number of spindle side gear teeth 2 1 to 32767SP027 GRA3 Number of spindle side gear teeth 3 1 to 32767SP028 GRA4 Number of spindle side gear teeth 4 1 to 32767SP029 GRB1 Number of motor side gear teeth 1 1 to 32767SP030 GRB2 Number of motor side gear teeth 2 1 to 32767SP031 GRB3 Number of motor side gear teeth 3 1 to 32767SP032 GRB4 Number of motor side gear teeth 4 1 to 32767SP096 EGRA Encoder gear ratio 0SP097 SPECO Orientation specifications 0000SP098 VGOP Speed loop gain proportional item for orientation 63SP099 VGOI Speed loop gain integral item for orientation 60SP100 VGOD Speed loop gain delay/advance item for orientation 15SP105 IQGO Current loop gain magnification for orientation 1 100SP106 IDGO Current loop gain magnification for orientation 2 100SP107 CSP2 Orientation deceleration rate 2 0SP108 CSP3 Orientation deceleration rate 3 0SP109 CSP4 Orientation deceleration rate 4 0SP119 MPGH Orientation position loop gain H coil compensation magnification 0SP120 MPGL Orientation position loop gain L coil compensation magnification 0SP121 MPCSH Deceleration rate H coil magnification for orientation 0SP122 MPCSL Deceleration rate L coil magnification for orientation 0
[Preparation] 1) The accurate gear ratio (or pulley ratio) from
the motor shaft to the encoder rotation shaft is required. Confirm that the correct number of gear teeth is set in SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB1).
SP025 (GRA1) to SP028 (GRA4) = A×C×E SP029 (GRB1) to SP032 (GRB4) = B×D×F Note) SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) may be
set by the customer, so confirm that the accurate values corresponding to the machine are set.
2) Confirm that the parameters are set as shown
above.
Encoder
Spindle
(A to F are the number of gear teeth)
Motor
1. Adjustment Procedures
VI - 6
1.3.7 Preparation for magnetic sensor orientation adjustment [Related parameters]
Parameter No. Abbrev. Name Default value
SP001 PGM Position loop gain during orientation for magnetic sensor, motor-built-in encoder 100
SP004 OINP Orientation in-position width 16SP005 OSP Orientation changeover speed limit value 0SP006 CSP Deceleration rate at orientation 20SP007 OPST Orientation position shift amount 0SP025 GRA1 Number of spindle side gear teeth 1 1 to 32767SP026 GRA2 Number of spindle side gear teeth 2 1 to 32767SP027 GRA3 Number of spindle side gear teeth 3 1 to 32767SP028 GRA4 Number of spindle side gear teeth 4 1 to 32767SP029 GRB1 Number of motor side gear teeth 1 1 to 32767SP030 GRB2 Number of motor side gear teeth 2 1 to 32767SP031 GRB3 Number of motor side gear teeth 3 1 to 32767SP032 GRB4 Number of motor side gear teeth 4 1 to 32767SP097 SPECO Orientation specifications 0000SP098 VGOP Speed loop gain proportional item for orientation 63SP099 VGOI Speed loop gain integral item for orientation 60SP100 VGOD Speed loop gain delay/advance item for orientation 15SP105 IQGO Current loop gain magnification for orientation 1 100SP106 IDGO Current loop gain magnification for orientation 2 100SP107 CSP2 Orientation deceleration rate 2 0SP108 CSP3 Orientation deceleration rate 3 0SP109 CSP4 Orientation deceleration rate 4 0SP119 MPGH Orientation position loop gain H coil compensation magnification 0SP120 MPGL Orientation position loop gain L coil compensation magnification 0SP121 MPCSH Deceleration rate H coil magnification for orientation 0SP122 MPCSL Deceleration rate L coil magnification for orientation 0
SP123 MGD0 Magnetic sensor output peak value Standard magnet = 542Compact magnet = 500
SP124 MGD1 Magnetic sensor linear zone width Standard magnet = 768Compact magnet = 440
SP125 MGD2 Magnetic sensor changeover point Standard magnet = 384Compact magnet = 220
[Preparation] 1) The accurate gear ratio (or pulley ratio) from
the motor shaft to the magnetic sensor rotation shaft is required. Confirm that the correct number of gear teeth is set in SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB1).
SP025 (GRA1) to SP028 (GRA4) = A×C×E SP029 (GRB1) to SP032 (GRB4) = B×D×F Note) SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) may be
set by the customer, so confirm that the accurate values corresponding to the machine are set.
2) Confirm that the parameters are set as shown
above.
Spindle
(A to F are the number of gear teeth)
Motor
1. Adjustment Procedures
VI - 7
1.3.8 Adjusting the orientation [Adjustment] (Parameters that differ only during encoder orientation are indicated in parentheses .) (1) Adjusting the orientation position shift
There is no potentiometer or rotary switch for the position shift. Set the position shift with SP007 (OPST). Change and adjust the SP007 (OPST) setting so that the target stop point is attained.
(2) Orientation
Normal rotation speed Orientation changeover speed
Adjust with the following procedures according to the orientation state.
Adjustment procedure
Phenomenon SP001 (PGM) SP002 (PGE)
SP006 (CSP)
Motor overtravels when stopping
Orientation time is long
Motor hunts when stopping
Excessive error alarm occurs
Adjust SP001 (PGM) SP002 (PGE) first, and then adjust SP006 (CSP). When adjusting the shortest orientation time for each gear stage, adjust SP107 (CSP2), SP108 (CSP3) and SP109 (CSP4) in the same manner. When using a coil changeover motor and adjusting the shortest orientation time for each coil, adjust SP119 (MPGH), SP120 (MPGL), SP121 (MPCSH) and SP122 (MPCSL) in the same manner. If the gear ratio is large (for example, 1:10), and the excessive error alarm occurs and the state cannot be fixed with the above adjustments, adjust SP005 (OPSP). If the spindle slowly rotates in the forward/reverse run directions during magnetic sensor orientation and does not stop, change the setting for the detector installation bit with SP097 (SPEC0).
1.3.9 Adjusting the servo rigidity Use the following adjustments to improve the servo rigidity during orientation stop. 1) Raise the position loop gain to the degree that the motor does not overtravel during orientation stop. Motor built-in encoder orientation, magnetic sensor orientation: Increase the SP001 (PGM) value. Encoder orientation : Increase the SP002 (PGE) value. 2) Raise the SP098 (VGOP) and SP099 (VGO1) values at the same rate to the degree that vibration
does not occur during orientation stop. For example, if SP098 (VGOP) is set to 80, set SP099 (VGO1) to 80. 3) The impact response at stopping can be improved by increasing the SP100 (VGOD) value.
However, when this value is increased, the torque in respect to the position deviation will drop, resulting in an adverse effect such as variation of the orientation stop position. PI control is applied when this value is set to "0".
Note 1) : Increase the setting value
: Do not change the setting value
: Decrease the setting value
Note 2) The excessive error alarm will also occur when the detector direction SP097 (SPEC0) is incorrectly set.
1. Adjustment Procedures
VI - 8
1.3.10 Delay/advance control and PI control Select delay/advance control for normal orientation. (SP100 (VGOD) ≠ 0) Select PI control in the following cases. (SP100 (VGOD) = 0) When the spindle's static friction torque is large, and a stopping position accuracy is required During PI control, the servo rigidity will drop slightly compared to delay/advance control. Thus, make a selection that matches the machine specifications.
1.3.11 Troubleshooting for orientation trouble (1) Orientation does not take place. (The motor keeps running.)
Cause Investigation item Remedy Remarks
Parameter setting value is inappropriate
The orientation detector and parameter do not match. SP037 (SFNC5) Motor built-in encoder orientation･ 4Encoder orientation ････････････ 1Magnetic sensor orientation ･････ 2
Correctly set SP037 (SFNC5).
The specifications do not match
Orientation is attempted with the motor built-in encoder using a standard motor instead of a motor with Z-phase.
Change to a motor having a motor built-in encoder with Z-phase.
For motor built-in encoder orientation
Wiring mistake
The connector pin numbers are incorrect, or the inserted connector number is incorrect, or the cable is broken.
Correctly wire. Replace the wire.
(2) The motor overtravels and stops.
Cause Investigation item Remedy Remarks The gear ratio parameters SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) are not correct.
Correctly set SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4).
The state is improved when the deceleration rate parameter for orientation SP006 (CSP) is halved.
Readjust SP006 (CSP). This also applies to: SP107 (CSP2) SP108 (CSP3) SP109 (CSP4) SP121 (MPCSH)SP122 (MPGL)
The state is improved when the position loop gain parameters SP001 (PGM) and SP002 (PGE) are halved.
Readjust SP001 (PGM) and SP002 (PGE)
This also applies to: SP119 (MPGH) SP122 (MPGL)
Parameter setting value is inappropriate
The orientation stop direction is uni-directional (CCW or CW).
Set bit 0 and 1 of SP097 (SPEC0) to "0".
1. Adjustment Procedures
VI - 9
(3) The stopping position deviates.
Cause Investigation item Remedy Remarks There is backlash or slip, etc., between the spindle and encoder. The gear ratio between the spindle and encoder is not 1:1 or 1:2.
For encoder orientation
Mechanical cause
The stop position is not deviated on the encoder shaft.
There is backlash or slip, etc., between the spindle and motor. The gear ratio between the spindle and motor is not 1:1.
For motor built-in encoder orientation
The position detector cable is relayed with a terminal block (connector), etc.
Do not relay the cable.
The position detector cable shield is not properly treated.
Properly treat the shield.
Noise
Too much signal wire is peeled and exposed at the connector section of the position detector cable. (The section with no shield is long.)
Keep the peeled and exposed section to 3cm or less when possible. Separate the peeled and exposed section from the drive wire.
(4) The stopping position does not change even when the position shift parameter is changed.
Cause Investigation item Remedy Remarks Parameter setting value is inappropriate
The position shift was changed from 2048 when the gear ratio between the spindle and encoder is 1:2 (one encoder rotation with two spindle rotations).
If the gear ratio between the spindle and encoder is 1:2, the position shift amount for one spindle rotation is 2048 and not 4096.
(5) Vibration occurs when stopping.
Cause Investigation item Remedy Remarks Parameter setting value is inappropriate
The gear ratio parameters SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) are not correct.
Correctly set SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4).
The vibration frequency is several hertz.
Decrease the position loop gain parameters SP001 (PGM) and SP002 (PGE). Increase the current loop gain parameters for orientation SP105 (IQG0) and SP106 (IDG0).
Orientation is not properly adjusted
The vibration frequency is 10Hz or more.
Decrease the speed loop gain parameters for orientation SP098 (VG0P) and SP099 (VG010). Decrease the current loop gain parameters for orientation SP015 (IQG0) and SP106 (IDG0).
1. Adjustment Procedures
VI - 10
(6) The orientation complete signal is not output.
Cause Investigation item Remedy Remarks Refer to section (1) Orientation does not take place.
Decrease the in-position parameter PS004 (OINP).
Review the in-position range, and increase SP004 (OINP). The machine
load is heavy The state is improved when the control for orientation stop is changed from delay/advance to PI control.
Review the speed loop gain parameters for orientation SP098 (VG0P), SP099 (VG0I) and SP100 (VG0D).
1.4 Adjusting the synchronous tap
Refer to the "CNC Specifications Manual" for details on the adjustment procedures.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 11
2. Troubleshooting
WARNING 1. Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the
CHARGE lamp on the power supply unit (resistance regeneration converter unit) has turned OFF before starting maintenance or inspections. Failure to observe this could result in spindle amplifier damage or electric shock faults.
2. Only qualified technician must carry out the maintenance and inspections. Work carried out by other personnel could result in electric shocks. Contact your nearest Service Center or Service Station for repairs and part replacement.
2.1 Introduction
If any trouble occurs in the control unit, check the following items first. Then, carry out the inspections and repairs explained in this section. The following information is extremely useful when contacting the machine tool builder's Service Department.
Items to confirm at trouble occurrence
Notice Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) on the spindle amplifier.
1. Check the 7-segment display on the drive unit or the monitor screen on the personal computer to
confirm which alarm is displayed on the drive unit. Also check the past alarms. (Refer to VI-15 List of alarms and warnings.) 2. Can the fault or abnormality be repeated? 3. Is the ambient temperature and inner-panel temperature correct? 4. Was the motor accelerating, decelerating or in constant speed operation? What was the speed? 5. Does the state differ during forward run and reverse run? 6. Did an instantaneous power failure occur? 7. Did the problem occur at a specific operation or command? 8. At what frequency does the problem occur? 9. Does the problem occur when the load is applied or removed? 10. Were any remedial measures, etc., taken? 11. How many years has the equipment been in use? 12. Is the power voltage correct? Does it fluctuate greatly depending on the time?
2.2 Step 1 Check the following items as step 1 of troubleshooting. (1) Power voltage ... 200V (+10% -15%) 50Hz, 200 to 230V (+10% -15%) 60Hz. The power voltage
does not drop below 200 -15% for even a short time. (Example) • The voltage drops at a set time each day. • The voltage drops when a specific machine is started.
(2) Are the control functions around the unit normal? (Example) • Are the NC and sequence circuit, etc., normal? • Visually check for any problems with the wiring, etc.
(3) Is the control unit's ambient temperature (inner-panel temperature) 55°C or less? (4) Are there any abnormalities in the unit's appearance?
(Example) Loosening of the connected connectors, damage, entry of foreign matter, etc.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 12
The general problem can be approximately pinpointed by carefully confirming the above state. The MDS-A-CV and SP problems are largely classified into the following types. The controller power was turned ON for the first time, but normal operation was not possible. (I) Fault class A The system operates normally, but suddenly malfunctions. (II) Normal operation does not take place sometimes. The orientation stop position deviates. An alarm is displayed. (III) Unit fault Power supply unit fault Resistance regeneration converter unit fault Spindle drive unit fault Detector fault Motor speed detection encoder fault 1024p/rev encoder fault Magnetic sensor fault Fault in parameters or data transmitted from personal computer Power supply fault Motor fault Other fault (Incorrect conditions for input signals, broken cable, etc.)
2.3 Step 2
Fault class I Investigation item Remedy The controller is strictly tested before shipment. Normal operation when the power is turned ON for the first time may not be possible due to: (1) The unit was bumped against
something and damaged during operation or installation.
(1) Visually check the unit appearance for
abnormal points.
(2) Incorrect or broken external wiring or sequence.
Is the ground wire correctly wired? Note that the power phase order is irrelevant.
(2) Check that the unit's 7-segment LED is ON. Check that the external wiring and
sequence are complete. (Note 1) Check the input/output signals to the unit
with the personal computer's monitor screen or with an oscilloscope.
(3) Are the parameter settings correct?
(3) Check the spindle parameters.
The controller power was turned ON for the first time, but normal operation was not possible.
(4) The motor speed does not increase.
(4) Check that the motor's UVW wires are correctly connected.
When using the built-in motor, check that the speed detector's output waveform is correct.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 13
Fault class I Investigation item Remedy
(5) Operation is normal when motor is run as an isolated unit.
(5) Check that the load state is as designed.
(6) Orientation stop is incorrect (overtravels, etc.)
(6) Adjust the orientation.
(7) An alarm is displayed on the unit's 7-segment.
(7) Check section "2.5 Approach per phenomenon".
(Note 1) Turn the start signal SRN and SRI input ON at least one second after the READY signal is
input.
Fault class II Investigation item Remedy (1) Check the input power voltage.
200VAC +10% -15% 50Hz 200 to 230VAC +10% -15% 60Hz
(1) If the power voltage is abnormal, return it to the correct level.
Secure a power capacity that can maintain the voltages given on the left even during a transient state (during acceleration/deceleration, during cutting).
(2) An alarm is displayed on the unit's 7-segment.
(2) Check section "2.5 Approach per phenomenon".
(3) Are the signals input from the NC (PC) correct?
(3) Check with the personal computer's Monitor screen, or check the DIO and S-analog voltage with an oscilloscope.
The system operates normally, but suddenly malfunctions.
(4) Is each detector's output waveform correct?
• Built-in speed detector • 1024P/rev encoder • Magnetic sensor
(4) Check the waveform with an oscilloscope. Then, readjust or replace.
Fault class III Investigation item Remedy When this occurs, it is necessary to completely understand the state of occurrence. (Load state, operation mode, etc.) The following three causes can be considered:
Normal operation does not take place sometimes. The orientation stop position deviates. An alarm is displayed, but normal operation is restored when the power is turned ON again or reset.
(1) The input power instantly fails or instantly drops, and an instantaneous power failure error is displayed.
(1) Investigate in detail for fluctuation of the input power, etc.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 14
Fault class III Investigation item Remedy
(2) The control circuit malfunctioned due to abnormally large noise, etc.
The unit can withstand power line noise up to 1600V/1us.
(2) Find the source of the noise and install a surge killer, etc.
Review the connection of the unit's grounding, and detector's shield and grounding, etc.
(3) Orientation is incorrect. The orientation stop position
deviates. The orientation time is long.
(3) Adjust the orientation parameters again. (Change the SP001, 002 and 006 setting
values.) When using the 1024P/rev encoder,
investigate the backlash between the spindle and encoder.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 15
2.4 List of alarms and warnings Alarm
No. Abbrev. Name Details Oper-ation
Resetting method
12 ME Memory error A check sum or RAM check error occurred in the spindle drive unit's control card ROM.
a AR
13 SWE Software processing error
The software data process did not end within the set time. a PR
17 ADE AD error The current detection AD converter did not function correctly during initialization.
a PR
20 NS1 No signal (motor PLG - Z phase)
The motor PLG's Z phase signal was not input, or the signal was not at the correct level.
a PR
21 NS No signal (spindle encoder)
The signal was not input from the spindle encoder, or was not at the correct level.
a PR
23 OSE Excessive speed deflection
The speed command and motor speed deflection exceeded the specified value (50r/min: fixed value), and the state continued for a specified time.
a PR
31 OS Overspeed The motor's actual speed exceeded 115% of the set maximum speed. a PR 32 PMOC Power module
overcurrent A current exceeding the set value flowed into the IPM used in the spindle drive's main circuit.
a PR
37 PE Parameter error A parameter exceeding the tolerable range was set. a PR 3B PMOH Power module overheat The IPM used in the spindle drive unit's main circuit overheated. a PR 3F OSE2 Excessive speed
deflection 2 The speed command and motor speed deflection exceeded the specified value (SP194 setting value: %), and the state continued for a specified time.
a PR
40 KE1 TK unit change error The changeover signal procedure was mistaken when using the TK unit. a PR 41 KE2 TK unit communication
error The communication with the TK unit was not correct when using the TK unit.
a PR
42 PLE PLG feedback error When PLG automatic adjustment was carried out, the A and B phase signal offset was greatly deviated.
a PR
46 OHM Motor overheat Overload, or the motor cooling blower stopped and the motor overheated causing the built-in thermal protector to function.
a PR
50 OL Overload The motor exceeded the overload detection level for a time longer than the detection time constant.
a PR
51 OL2 Overload 2 A load exceeding the continuous rating was applied on the motor for longer than the specified time.
a PR
52 OD Excessive error The position tracking error exceeded the specified value during orientation. a PR 5C ORFE Orientation feedback
error The feedback counter value exceeded the specified value when orientation was completed.
a PR
61 to 6E
Power supply alarm An alarm occurred in the power supply unit. a Note 2
6F PSE Power supply not connected
(1) The power supply unit is not connected. (2) An alarm occurred in the power supply unit.
a AR Note 2
70 to 77
Power supply alarm An alarm occurred in the power supply unit. a Note 2
88 WD Watch dog The spindle drive unit's software process did not end within the set time. a AR 8A TE1 TOSNUC
communication error 1 Data communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly. a PR
8B TPE Parameter conversion error
A parameter conversion request was issued from TOSNUC while the spindle drive unit was in the gate ON state.
a PR
8C TE2 TOSNUC communication error 2
Synchronized communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly. a PR
A9 WOFE Orientation feedback error warning
The spindle drive unit is retrying orientation. b -
E1 WOL Overload warning The motor current exceeded the overload detection level for a time 80% or more of the detection time constant.
b -
E4 WPE Parameter error warning
When setting the parameters after turning the spindle drive unit power ON, a value exceeding the tolerable range was set.
b -
E7 NCE Emergency stop warning
The emergency stop warning was input from TOSNUC. c -
Note 1) If the above protective functions activate, the alarm No. will appear on the spindle drive unit's 7-segment LED, and the following operation will take place. The resetting methods are listed below. [Operation] a : The base interception is carried out for the spindle drive unit, the external contactor turns OFF, and the motor coasts to a stop. b : Only a warning is displayed. Operation continues. c : The motor decelerates to a stop with regenerative braking. Then, the base interception is carried out, and the external contactor turns OFF momentarily. [Resetting methods] AR : Turn the spindle drive unit and power supply power OFF once. PR : Input the reset signal from TOSNUC. - : Operation is automatically resumed after the warning is reset. Note that if the emergency stop warning occurs, the start signal must be turned OFF once. (Except during orientation.)
Note 2) If an alarm occurs in the power supply unit, a value between 61 and 77 will appear on the LED. Refer to (2) Power supply unit on the next page for details on the alarm and the resetting methods.
Note 3) If parameter SP038 (SFNC6)-bit 0 is set to "1", operation "c" will take place for alarm Nos. 21, 46 and 52. Note that in this case, the external contactor will turn OFF immediately after the motor stops regardless of the parameter SP192 (FNC0) setting.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 16
2.5 Approach per phenomenon 2.5.1 Details when alarm or warning is displayed on the 7-segment display
(1) Alarm No. 12 : Memory error 1 [Meaning]
A check sum or RAM check error occurred in the spindle drive unit’s internal ROM. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
Occurs each time the power is turned ON.
Replace the spindle drive unit. 1 Investigate the repeatability.
Occurs periodically. Investigate item 2, and remedy. 1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground. 2) The alarm occurs easily when certain
device operates. Take noise prevention measures for the left device.
2 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating
noise near the unit? No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
(2) Alarm No. 13 : Software processing error
[Meaning] The spindle drive unit’s software data process did not end within the set time.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy Occurs each time the power is turned ON.
Replace the spindle drive unit. 1 Investigate the repeatability.
Occurs periodically. Investigate item 2, and remedy. 1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground. 2) The alarm occurs easily when certain
device operates. Take noise prevention measures for the left device.
2 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating
noise near the unit? No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
(3) Alarm No. 17 : AD error
[Meaning] The current detection A/D converter circuit in the spindle drive unit did not function correctly during initialization.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy Occurs each time the power is turned ON.
Replace the spindle drive unit. 1 Investigate the repeatability.
Occurs periodically. Investigate item 2, and remedy. 1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground. 2) The alarm occurs easily when certain
device operates. Take noise prevention measures for the left device.
2 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating
noise near the unit? No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
(4) Alarm No. 20 : No signal (motor PLG - Z phase)
[Meaning] Error in the Z phase signal of the motor speed detection PLG.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy Occurs each time the power is turned ON.
Replace the spindle drive unit. 1 Check the spindle parameter (SP037: SFNC5) setting value.
Occurs periodically. Investigate item 2, and remedy. The waveform is not correct. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to
section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector.
2 Check the speed detector waveform.
The waveform is correct. Investigate item 3, and remedy. The connection is faulty or broken. Replace the detector cable.
Correctly connect. 3 Turn the power OFF, and check the
detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Replace the spindle drive unit or
detector.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 17
(5) Alarm No. 21 : No signal detection [Meaning]
Error in the 1024P/rev encoder for orientation or 90,000 pulse encoder for C axis A, B, Z phase signals.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy Bit 0 is set to "1" even though encoder orientation is not used.
Correctly set. 1 Check the spindle parameter (SP037: SFNC5) setting value.
No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy. Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install. 2 Tug the connector to check if the
detector connector (spindle drive unit side and detector side) is disconnected.
Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 3, and remedy.
The connection is faulty or broken. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connect.
3 Turn the power OFF and check the detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Replace the spindle drive unit or
detector.
(6) Alarm No. 23 : Excessive speed deflection [Meaning]
The speed command and current motor speed difference exceeded 50rpm for 12 seconds or more.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy The wiring is not correct. Correctly wire. 1 Check the UVW wiring between the
spindle drive unit and motor. The wiring is correct. Investigate item 2, and remedy. The values are not correct. Correctly set. 2 Check the spindle parameter (SP034,
SP040, SP055, SP257 and following) setting value.
The correct values are set. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
Takes more 12 sec. or more. Increase the spindle parameter (SP055) setting value.
3 Measure the acceleration/deceleration time to the spindle maximum speed. If the alarm occurs when changing from forward run (reverse run) to reverse run (forward run), measure the time from the forward run (reverse run) maximum speed to the reverse run (forward run) maximum speed.
Takes 12 sec. or less. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
The load amount is 120% or higher. Decrease the load. 4 If the alarm occurs during cutting, check the load amount. The load amount is 119% or lower. Investigate item 5, and remedy.
Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install. 5 Tug the connector to check if the speed detector connector (spindle drive unit side and detector side) is disconnected.
Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 6, and remedy.
The connection is faulty or broken. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connect.
6 Turn the power OFF and check the speed detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Investigate item 7, and remedy.
The waveform is not correct. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector.
7 Check the speed detector waveform.
The waveform is correct. Replace the spindle drive unit.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 18
(7) Alarm No. 31 : Overspeed [Meaning]
The motor speed exceeded 115% of the value set in spindle parameter (SP017:TSP). Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
Occurs only during speed loop operation. Investigate item 2, and remedy. 1 Investigate the repeatability. Occurs constantly. Investigate item 3, and remedy. The setting value is "2000" or less. Increase the setting value. 2 Check the spindle parameter (SP017:
TSP) setting value. The setting value is "2001" or more. Investigate item 3, and remedy. 1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground. 2) The alarm occurs easily when certain
device operates. Take noise prevention measures for the left device.
3) The cables are correctly shielded. Correctly shield the cables.
3 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating
noise near the unit? 3) Are the speed and position detector
cables correctly shielded? No special problem Investigate item 4, and remedy.
The waveform is not correct. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector.
4 Check the speed detector waveform.
The waveform is correct. Replace the spindle drive unit.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 19
(8) Alarm No. 32 : Power module error [Meaning]
One of the following errors occurred in the IPM used by the spindle drive unit. 1) The overcurrent protection functioned. 2) The IPM internal temperature rose above a set value. 3) The base power voltage dropped.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy Occurs before ready ON. Replace the spindle drive unit. 1 Check when the phenomenon occurred. Occurs after servo ON. Investigate item 2, and remedy. The values are not correct. Correctly set. 2 Check the spindle parameter (SP034,
SP040, SP055, SP257 and following) setting value.
The correct values are set. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
The load amount is 120% or higher. Decrease the load. 3 If the alarm occurs during cutting, check the load amount. The load amount is 119% or lower. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
The values are not correct. Correctly set. Change the setting values as explained for SP067 to SP069. Try increasing the SP270 to SP273 setting values by two to three fold. Try setting the SP276 and SP277 setting values to 0.
4 If the alarm occurs when the motor is decelerating from speed of 8000rpm or more, check the spindle parameters (SP067, SP068, SP069). When using special motor constants, check the (SP270 to SP273, SP276, SP277) setting values.
The correct values are set.
Investigate item 5, and remedy. The values are not correct. Correctly set.
Try setting a value between 1 and 8 in SP046. (Setting 1 is the most effective.)
5 If the alarm occurs the instant that the motor starts accelerating or decelerating, check the spindle parameter (SP046) value.
The correct values are set.
Investigate item 6, and remedy. 1) The screws are loose. Tighten. 2) There is a short circuit. Replace the cable. 3) There is a ground fault. Replace the cable.
6 Check the U, V and W wiring between the spindle drive unit and motor. 1) Are any terminal screws loose? 2) Is the wire short-circuited between
the phases? 3) Is there a ground fault at any phase? Open both ends of the cable when
checking items 2) and 3).
No special problem Investigate item 7, and remedy.
The resistance value is 1MΩ or less. Replace the motor. 7 Check the motor insulation. Perform a megger test between each motor wire and ground. The resistance value is more than 1MΩ. Investigate item 8, and remedy.
The cooling fan is stopped. Replace the spindle drive unit. 8 Check the spindle drive unit's cooling fan. The cooling fan is rotating correctly. Investigate item 9, and remedy.
The power voltage drops below 170V during acceleration/deceleration and cutting.
Review the power capacity. 9 Check the power voltage.
The power voltage is always 171V or more.
Investigate item 10, and remedy.
1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground. 2) The alarm occurs easily when certain
device operates. Take noise prevention measures for the left device.
10 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating
noise near the unit? No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 20
(9) Alarm No. 37 : Parameter error [Meaning]
An illegal spindle parameter was found during initialization. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
An incorrect value is set. Correctly set. 1 Check the spindle parameter setting values. The incorrectly set parameter number is displayed with the spindle drive unit's LED or personal computer's monitor screen.
No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy.
1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground. 2) The alarm occurs easily when certain
device operates. Take noise prevention measures for the left device.
2 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating
noise near the unit? No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
(10) Alarm No. 3B : Power module overheat
[Meaning] Overheating of the IPM used in the spindle drive unit’s main circuit was detected.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy Check the heat radiation environment. Check the rotation of the fan on the back of the unit.
The fan is not rotating correctly. Replace the fan.
Check for contamination of heat radiating fins on back of unit.
The heat radiating fins are heavily contaminated with cutting oil and dust, etc.
Clean the fins.
Take measures so that cutting oil and dust do not get on the fins.
Measure the unit's ambient temperature The temperature exceeds 55°C. Consider means to ventilate and cool the panel.
1
Nothing applies. Investigate item 2, and remedy. 1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground. 2) The alarm occurs easily when certain
device operates. Take noise prevention measures for the left device.
2 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating
noise near the unit? No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
(11) Alarm No. 3F : Excessive speed deflection 2
[Meaning] The speed command and motor speed deflection exceeded the tolerable value set in the parameter (SP194), and the state continued for a specified time (SP195).
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy An incorrect value is set, or the setting value is too small.
Correctly set. 1 Check the spindle parameter setting values.
No special problem Investigate items 3 and following for alarm No. 23 (excessive speed deflection).
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 21
(12) Alarm No. 40 : TK unit change error [Meaning]
The changeover signal procedure was mistaken when using the TK unit. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
1 Refer to the separate 1-amplifier 2-motor specifications (BNP-A-2993-22).
(13) Alarm No. 41 : TK unit communication error
[Meaning] The communication between the TK unit and spindle drive unit was not correct when using the TK unit.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy 1 Refer to the separate 1-amplifier
2-motor specifications (BNP-A-2993-22).
(14) Alarm No. 46 : Motor overheat
[Meaning] The motor overheated and the thermal protector built-in the motor overheated.
When this alarm occurs, it cannot be reset until the motor has stopped and the motor cooling fan has run for 10 or more minutes.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
Occurs immediately after turning power ON. Occurs several minutes after operation starts.
Investigate item 2, and remedy. 1 Investigate the repeatability.
Occurs after operating for a while. Investigate item 5, and remedy. Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install. 2 Tug the speed detector cable connector
on the spindle drive unit to see if it is disconnected.
No special problem Investigate item 3, and remedy.
A connection defect is found. Correctly connect. 3 Check the speed detector cable connection. The connection is correct. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
The resistance value is several 100Ω or higher.
Replace the motor. 4 Check between OHS1 and OHS2 on the motor thermal protector with a tester.
The resistance value is 10Ω or lower. Replace the spindle drive unit.
The unit is started and stopped frequently, or the cutting load is large.
Decrease the starting/stopping frequency or lower the load.
5 Check the spindle load amount.
No special problem Investigate item 6, and remedy. The motor cooling fan wiring is incorrect. Correctly wire. The wiring is correct but the fan does not rotate.
Replace the motor. 6 Check the motor cooling fan wiring and
rotation.
No special problem Investigate item 7, and remedy. The finger guard is clogged. Clean. 7 Check the finger guard on the motor
cooling fan section. No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 22
(15) Alarm No. 50 : Overload Alarm No. 51 : Overload
[Meaning] Alarm No. 50
The current flowing to the spindle motor exceeded the overload detection level (spindle parameter SP064: OLL) and continued longer than the overload detection time (spindle parameter SP063: OLT).
Alarm No. 51 A load exceeding the spindle motor's continuous rating was applied for longer than the specified time.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy The values are not correct. Correctly set. 1 Check the spindle parameter (SP034,
SP040, SP055, SP257 and following) setting value.
The correct values are set. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
The standard value is not set. Set the standard value. 2 Check the spindle parameter (SP063 and SP064) setting value. The standard value is set. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
1) The screws are loose. Tighten. 2) There is a short circuit. Replace the cable. 3) There is a ground fault. Replace the cable.
3 Check the U, V and W wiring between the spindle drive unit and motor. 1) Are any terminal screws loose? 2) Is the wire short-circuited between
the phases? 3) Is there a ground fault at any phase? Open both ends of the cable when
checking items 2) and 3).
No special problem Investigate item 4, and remedy.
Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install. 4 Tug the connector to check if the speed detector connector (spindle drive unit side and detector side) is disconnected.
Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 5, and remedy.
The connection is faulty or broken. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connect.
5 Turn the power OFF and check the speed detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Investigate item 6, and remedy.
The waveform is not correct. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector.
6 Check the speed detector waveform.
The waveform is correct. Investigate item 7, and remedy. The load amount exceeds the motor rating.
Decrease the load to within the motor rating.
7 Check the motor load amount.
No special problem Investigate item 8, and remedy. The motor is locked. Review the machine side. 8 Check the motor rotation. No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 23
(16) Alarm No. 52 : Excessive error [Meaning]
The position tracking error exceeded the specified value (excessive error width setting value) during orientation. • excessive error width setting value (SP102: OODR): Standard value 32767 (32767 pulses)
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy 1 Investigate the repeatability. Occurs during orientation. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
OK if the bit 5 setting value is changed. Change the bit 5 setting value. 2 If the alarm occurs during encoder orientation, check the spindle parameter (SP097: SPEC0) bit 5 setting value.
NG even if the bit 5 setting value is changed.
Return the bit 5 setting value to the original value, investigate item 3, and remedy.
OK if PGM and PGE are doubled or if CSP is decreased to half.
Change the setting values. 3 Check the spindle parameter (SP001: PGM, SP002: PGE, SP006: CSP) setting value. NG even with the above settings. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install. 4 Tug the connector to check if the position/speed detector connectors (spindle drive unit side and position/speed detector sides) are disconnected.
Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 5, and remedy.
The connection is faulty or broken. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connect.
5 Turn the power OFF and check the position/speed detector cable connections with a tester. The connection is correct. Investigate item 6, and remedy.
The waveform is not correct. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector.
6 Check the speed detector waveform.
The waveform is correct. Replace the spindle drive unit or position detector.
(17) Alarm No. 5C : Orientation feedback error
[Meaning] The command and feedback difference exceeded the setting value (SP114: OPER) when orientation in-position was completed.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy The cable is not correctly shielded. Correctly shield the cable. 1 Is the speed detector cable correctly
shielded? The cable is correctly shielded. Investigate item 2, and remedy. The cable is relayed. Use one encoder cable. 2 Is the encoder cable relayed? The cable is not relayed. Investigate item 3, and remedy. The cable is broken. Replace the cable. 3 Extend and contract the encoder or
speed detector cable, and check whether it is broken with a tester.
The cable is not broken. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
The waveform is deviated. Correctly adjust. Refer to adjustment procedures (BFN-14052-01)
The waveform is correct. Investigate item 4 for the spindle, and remedy.
4 Check whether the speed detector's A, B and Z phase waveform is adjausted.
(18) Alarm No. 61 to 7F : Power supply alarm [Meaning]
An error was detected in the power supply unit. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
1 Refer to the troubleshooting section for the power supply.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 24
(19) Alarm No. 8A 8B 8C : TOSNUC communication error 1/Parameter conversion error/ TOSNUC communication error 2 [Meaning]
8A: Data communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly. 8B: A parameter conversion request was issued from TOSNUC while the spindle drive unit
was in the gate ON state. 8C: Synchronized communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly, or an illegal
spindle parameter was found during initialization. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
Is disconnected (loose). Excessive force is applied.
Correctly install. 1 Tug the connection connectors or terminating connectors between the NC and spindle drive units to check if they are disconnected. Also check if an excessive force is being applied on the connectors.
No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy.
A connection defect is found. Replace the cable 2 Disconnect each cable in item 1, and check the connection with a tester. No connection defect was found. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground. 2) The alarm occurs easily when certain
device operates. Take noise prevention measures for the left device.
3 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating
noise near the unit? No special problem Check and remedy the Toshiba Machine CNC hardware, etc. → If the problem still cannot be remedied, replace the spindle drive unit.
(19) Warning No. E1 : Overload warning
[Meaning] The current flowing to the spindle motor exceeded the overload detection level (spindle parameter SP064: OLL) and the time exceeded 80% of the overload detection time (spindle parameter SP063: OLT).
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy 1 Perform the same investigation and
remedies as for alarm No. 50.
(20) Warning No. E7 : Emergency stop
[Meaning] An emergency stop signal was input from an external source.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy Switch is ON. Turn OFF the emergency stop switch. 1 Check whether the emergency stop
switch is on. Switch is OFF. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install. 2 Tug the DIO connector to check if it is
disconnected. Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 3, and remedy. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connect.
3 Turn the power OFF and check the position/speed detector cable connections with a tester.
The connection is faulty or broken.
Investigate item 4, and remedy. The connection is faulty, or the power is not supplied.
Correctly connect. Supply the +24V power.
4 Confirm that the +24V power for DIO is correctly connected and supplied.
The connection is correct. Replace the spindle amplifier.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 25
2.5.2 Details when alarm or warning is not displayed on 7-segment unit
(1) No abnormality is displayed, but the motor does not rotate. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
The wiring is incorrect. Loose screws or broken wires are found.
Correctly wire. Tighten the screws. Replace the wires.
1 Check the wiring around the power supply unit and spindle drive unit. Also check for looseness in the terminal screws and for broken wires, etc.
No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy.
Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install. 2 Tug the connectors to check whether they are disconnected. Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 3, and remedy.
The power is not supplied. Supply the +24V power. 3 Check that the +24V power for DIO is correctly supplied. The power is supplied. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
The voltage exceeds the specified value. Restore the power to the specified value.4 Check the input voltage. The voltage is within the specified value. Investigate item 5, and remedy. The correct values are not set. Set the correct values. 5 Check all spindle parameters. The correct values are set. Investigate item 6, and remedy. The signal is not input or the sequence is incorrect. The orientation command is input.
Correct the input signals. 6 Check the input signals. Are the READY, forward run, reverse run signals input? The forward and reverse run signals must be input at least one second after READY ON. The forward run and reverse run signals may be turned ON simultaneously.
No special problem Investigate item 7, and remedy.
The speed command is not correctly input.
Correctly input the speed command. 7 Check the speed command.
The speed command is input correctly. Replace the spindle drive unit.
(2) No fault is displayed, but the motor only rotates slowly, or a large noise is heard from the motor. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
The wiring is not correct. Correctly wire. 1 Check the U, V and W wiring between the spindle drive unit and motor The wiring is correct. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
One of the three phases is not the specified value.
Restore the power to the specified value.2 Check the input voltage.
No special problem Investigate item 3, and remedy. The speed command is not correctly input.
Correctly input the speed command. 3 Check the speed command.
The speed command is input correctly. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install. 4 Tug the connector to check if the speed
detector connector (spindle drive unit side and speed detector side) is disconnected.
Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 5, and remedy.
The connection is faulty or broken. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connected.
5 Turn the power OFF and check the speed detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Investigate item 6, and remedy.
The waveform is not correct. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector.
6 Check the speed detector waveform.
The waveform is correct. Replace the spindle drive.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 26
(3) The rotation speed command and actual rotation speed do not match. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
The speed command is not input correctly.
Input the correct speed command. 1 Check the speed command.
The speed command is correct. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Slipping is found. Repair the machine side. 2 Check for slips between the motor and
spindle. (If the belt or clutch are connected.)
No special problem Investigate item 3, and remedy.
The correct values are not set. Set the correct values. 3 Check the spindle parameters (SP034, SP040, SP017, SP257 and following). The correct values are set. Replace the spindle drive unit.
(4) The starting time is long or has increased in length. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
The torque has increased. Repair the machine side. 1 Check if the friction torque has increased. No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy.
The bearings do not rotate smoothly. Replace the spindle motor. 2 Rotate the motor bearings by hand to see that they are normal. The bearings rotate smoothly. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
The signal is input. Do not input the signal. 3 Check if the torque limit signal is being input. The signal is not input. Replace the spindle drive unit.
(5) The motor stops during cutting. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
The load meter indicates a value higher than 120% during cutting.
Decrease the load. 1 Check the load amount during cutting.
No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy. 2 Perform the same investigation and
remedies as for item (4).
(6) The vibration and noise (gear noise), etc., are large. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
The same sound is heard during coast to stop.
Repair the machine side. 1 Check the machine's dynamic balance. (Coast to a stop from the maximum speed.) No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy.
The vibration and sound increases at a certain speed during coast to stop.
Repair the machine side. 2 Check for a resonance point on the machine. (Coast to a stop from the maximum speed.) No special problem Investigate item 3, and remedy.
Backlash is large. Repair the machine side. 3 Check the machine backlash. No special problem Investigate item 4, and remedy. The phenomenon decreases when the setting value is lowered to half.
Change the setting. Note that the impact response will decrease.
4 Confirm the spindle parameter (SP022: VGNP1, SP023: VGN11, SP056: PYVR) settings. No change even with the above settings. Return the setting value to the original
value, perform investigation item 5, and remedy.
Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install. 5 Tug the connector to check if the speed detector connector (spindle drive unit side and speed detector side) is disconnected.
Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 6, and remedy.
The connection is faulty or broken. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connected.
6 Turn the power OFF and check the speed detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Investigate item 8, and remedy.
The waveform is not correct. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.)
Or, replace the detector.
7 Check the speed detector waveform.
The waveform is correct. Investigate item 7, and remedy. The state is reduced when the setting is changed as explained in SP067 to SP069.
Change the setting value. 8 Confirm the spindle parameter (SP067, SP068 and SP069)
The state does not change even when the above setting is made.
Replace the spindle drive unit.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 27
(7) The spindle coasts during deceleration. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
Slipping is found. Repair the machine side. 1 Check for slips between the motor and spindle. (If connected with a belt or clutch.)
No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
(8) The rotation is not stable. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
The rotation stabilizes when the setting values are doubled.
Change the setting. Note that the gear sound may increase.
1 Confirm the spindle parameter (SP022: VGNP1, SP023: VGNI1)
The state does not change even when the above settings are made.
Return the setting value to the original value, investigate item 2, and remedy.
Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install. 2 Tug the connector to check if the speed detector connector (spindle drive unit side and speed detector side) is disconnected.
Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 3, and remedy.
The connection is faulty or broken. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connected.
3 Turn the power OFF and check the speed detector cable connection with a tester. (Especially check the shield wiring.)
The connection is correct. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
The waveform is not correct. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector.
4 Check the speed detector waveform.
The waveform is correct. Investigate item 5, and set. The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground. 5 Investigate the wiring and installation
environment. Is the unit correctly grounded?
No special problem Investigate item 6, and set.
The state is reduced when the setting is changed as explained in SP067 to SP069.
Change the setting value. 6 Confirm the spindle parameter (SP067, SP068 and SP069)
The state does not change even when the above setting is made.
Replace the spindle drive unit.
(9) The motor speed does not rise above a set speed. Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
The speed command is not correctly input.
Correctly input the speed command. 1 Check the speed command. Check whether the override input on the machine operation panel is being input. The speed command is input correctly. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
The load has increased. Repair the machine side. 2 Check whether the load has increased suddenly. No special problem Investigate item 3, and remedy.
The bearings do not rotate smoothly. Replace the spindle motor. 3 Rotate the motor bearings by hand to see that they are normal. The bearings rotate smoothly. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install. 4 Tug the connector to check if the speed detector connector (spindle drive unit side and speed detector side) is disconnected.
Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 5, and remedy.
The connection is faulty or broken. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connected.
5 Turn the power OFF and check the speed detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Investigate item 6, and remedy.
The waveform is not correct. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector.
6 Check the speed detector waveform.
The waveform is correct. Replace the spindle drive unit.
2. Troubleshooting
VI - 28
2.6 Periodic inspections
WARNING 1. Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the
CHARGE lamp on the power supply unit (resistance regeneration converter unit) has turned OFF before starting maintenance or inspections. Failure to observe this could result in spindle amplifier damage or electric shock faults.
2. Only qualified technician must carry out the maintenance and inspections. Work carried out by other personnel could result in electric shocks. Contact your nearest Service Center or Service Station for repairs and part replacement.
Maintenance and inspections are indispensable for attaining the device's fullest performance, preventing accidents beforehand, and continuing highly reliable operation for a long time.
Notice Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) on the spindle amplifier's control circuit.
2.6.1 Inspecting the control unit
Inspection item
Inspection cycle Points Remedy
1 Cooling fan Once a month (1) Does the fan rotate smoothly when rotated by hand? (2) Does the fan rotate powerfully when the power is turned ON? (3) Are the bearings making any abnormal noise?
Replace the unit.
2 Contamination and screw loosening
As necessary Periodically clean the areas around the amplifier, especially the cooling fan, and tighten the input/output terminals and connections.
3 Wiring As necessary Check that the wires are not contacting the conductive parts and that they are not caught.
2.6.2 Inspecting the motor
Inspection item
Inspection cycle Points Remedy
1 Noise and vibration
Once a month Is there any new noise or abnormal vibration? Check the following items when there is any abnormality. (1) Check the foundation and installation. (2) Check the core alignment accuracy of the coupling. (3) Is any vibration conveyed from the coupler? (4) Are the bearings damaged or making any abnormal noise? (5) Are the reduction gears or belt vibrating or making any abnormal
noise? (6) Is there any abnormality in the control unit? (7) Is there any abnormality at the cooling fan section? (8) Is the belt tension appropriate?
Clean
2 Temperature rise
Once a month Is the bearing temperature normal? (Normally, approx. ambient temperature +10 to 40°C.) Has the motor frame temperature changed from normal use? Check the following items when there is any abnormality. (1) Is the cooling fan rotating normally? (2) Is there anything caught in the cooling wind path (between frame
and cover) thereby blocking the wind path? (3) Has the load increased abnormally?
(4) Is there any abnormality in the control unit? Refer to section 2.53 Insulation
resistance value
Every 6 months
Is the insulation resistance value abnormally low? Disconnect the wiring with the spindle drive unit, and perform a megger test between the circuit batch and ground. (No problem if the value is 1MΩ or more when measured with a 500V megger tester.) If the insulation resistance is 1MΩ or less, the inside of the motor must be cleaned and dried out. To dry, disassemble the motor and heat it in a dryer at a temperature less than 90°C
4 Cooling fan Weekly, monthly
Is the fan rotating normally and feeding wind? Is there any abnormal noise or vibration?
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 29
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor 3.1 Disassembling and assembling the SJ type AC spindle motor
1 Cable and PCB (1) Remove the cover of the terminal box
on the top of the fan case. (2) Disconnect the cable connected from
the power distribution box to the motor.
(a) Three motor main lead wires (U, V, W) (b) Two cooling fan lead wires (BU, BV) (c) Two thermal protector lead wires (OHS1, OHS2) (d) PCB's external connector mate
plug
(3) Remove the external connector from the external connector fixing clamp, and disconnect the internal connector from the socket.
(4) The PCB can be removed by removing the pan head screw fixing the PCB.
(5) Reassemble the PCB by following steps (1) to (4) in reverse.
Terminal box cover
Fan case
Pan head screw for fixing PCB PCB
External contactor fixing clamp
External connector Internal connector
Lead wire protection packing
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 30
2 Cooling fan 132 frame and smaller
(1) Remove the hexagon socket bolt fixing the finger guard.
(2) Remove the flat-head screw at the
center of the cooling fan. Only the fan will come off.
(3) Cut the four cooling fan lead wires
connected in the terminal box. The fan motor can be removed from the fan case when the pan head screw fixing the fan motor body is removed.
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 31
(4) Reassemble the cooling fan by
following steps (1) to (3) in reverse.
160 frame and larger (1) Remove the three hexagon socket
bolts fixing the fan case, and pull the fan case backward. The fan case can be removed with the cooling fan attached.
(2) Remove the hexagon socket bolt
fixing the finger guard.
Fan motor
Finger guard
Fan
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 32
(3) Cut the three cooling fan lead wires connected in the terminal box. The cooling fan can be removed from the fan case when the pan head screw fixing the cooling from the inner side of the fan case is removed. (4) Reassemble the cooling fan by
following steps (1) to (3) in reverse.
3 Sensor and detection gears (1) Disconnect the sensor's inner con-
nector from the PCB in the terminal box.
(2) Remove the three hexagon socket bolts fixing the fan case, and pull the fan case backward. The fan case can be removed with the cooling fan attached.
Cooling fan
Finger guard
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 33
(3) When the two pan head screws fixing the sensor installation seat are removed, the installation seat will come off with the sensor attached. Take care not to contact the sensor against the detection gears at this time.
(4) To adjust the sensor, loosen the
sensor fixing screw with the sensor installation seat fixed. Set a thickness gauge between the detection gears and sensor, and adjust the gap to 0.15±0.01. Confirm that the sensor's matching marks are aligned before tightening the sensor fixing screws to fix the sensor. (Refer to photo on right.)
(5) Apply screw lock on the sensor fixing
screw and installation seat fixing screw.
(6) Pull the sensor lead wires sufficiently
into the terminal box so that they do not get caught inside when assembl- ing the fan case.
(7) To remove the detection gears,
screw an eye bolt into the screw hole (MS screw), and by using a puller, turn the puller bolt with a spanner, etc.
(8) The detection gears should be
assembled onto the shaft with a shrink fit temperature of 100 to 150°, while taking care not to twist the gears. If the shrink fit temperature is too high, the detection gears will deform.
Sensor installation seat
Sensor Installation seat fixing screw
Thickness gauge Detection gears
Sensor fixing screw
Align the matching marks.
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 34
4 Bearings (1) The counter-load side bracket can be
removed when the shaft box cover fixing screw and bracket fixing hexagon socket bolt are removed.
(2) Apply sealing agent on the
engagement surface when assembl- ing the counter-load side bracket.
(3) To remove the counter-load side
bearings, first remove the shaft snap-ring. Then, by using a bearing puller, turn the axis box cover and puller bolt simultaneously with a spanner.
(4) To remove the load side bearings,
catch the claws of the puller onto the inner ring of the bearings and turn the handle.
Snap-ring for shaft
Apply sealing agent Bracket fixing bolt
Shaft box cover fixing screw
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 35
(5) Before fitting the bearings onto the shaft, wipe the bearing fitting section clean and remove any scratches or protrusions.
(6) Apply oil on the bearing's inner
diameter and shaft engagement surface. Fit the bearing on at a right angle, contact a suitable pipe against the inner ring section, and gradually press in with a press.
(7) If a press is not available, lightly tap
the bearings onto the shaft. Take care not to twist the bearings or contact the pipe against outer ring section.
Attaching the bearings with a press
Press.
Pipe Bearing
Attaching the bearings with a hammer
Pipe Bearing
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 36
• Confirming the motor built-in encoder (speed detector) waveform
The waveform must be confirmed and adjusted before running the motor after disassembly to reassembly. The explanation here is for the encoder without the Z phase. Refer to the separate adjustment procedures (BFN-14052-01) when using the encoder with Z phase.
1. PCB volume layout drawing
Check terminals PA: A phase signal PB: B phase signal AGA: Ground
Volume VR1: A phase 0 position adjustment VR2: A phase gain adjustment VR3: B phase 0 position adjustment VR4: B phase gain adjustment
2. Confirmation method (1) Set the spindle parameter SP038 (SFNC6) bit F to "1" and turn the spindle amplifier power
OFF and ON. (Enter the open loop.) (2) Input the forward run command, and gradually raise the motor speed to 1800rpm. (3) Measure the A and B phase waveforms with an oscilloscope. (4) Confirm that the waveform is as shown below. If not as shown below, adjust with VR1 to VR4. (5) If the waveform cannot be adjusted with VR1 to 4, readjust the gap between the sensor and
gear teeth. 1) If voltage level does not decrease below ±1.6V: Increase the gap 2) If voltage level does not increase above ±1.4V: Decrease the gap (6) Next, reverse run the motor and measure the waveform at 1800rpm. (7) Set the SP038 (SFNC6) bit F to "0" after completing the confirmation and adjustments, and
turn the spindle amplifier power OFF and ON.
Voltage [V] Voltage [V]
Time Time
A phase B phase A phase B phase
A phase/B phase output signal waveform during forward run
A phase/B phase output signal waveform during reverse run
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 37
3.2 Disassembling and assembling the SJ-N type AC spindle motor
1 Cable and PCB (1) Remove the cover of the terminal box
on the top of the fan case. (2) Disconnect the cable connected from
the power distribution box to the motor. (a) Three motor main lead wires (U, V, W) (b) Two cooling fan lead wires (BU, BV) (c) Two thermal protector lead wires (OHS1, OHS2) (d) PCB's external connector mate plug
(3) Remove the external connector from the external connector fixing clamp, and disconnect the internal connector from the socket.
(4) The PCB can be removed by
removing the pan head screw fixing the PCB.
(5) Reassemble the PCB by following
steps (1) to (4) in reverse.
Terminal box cover
Fan case
Pan head screw for fixing PCB PCB
External contactor fixing clamp
External connector Internal connector
Lead wire protection packing
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 38
(6) Installing the PCB
Method: Fix together with the case using two bolts. Connect the sensor connector. Caution: Do not connect the motor power cable to the bottom of the amplifier.
Motor cable is placed under the amplifier. Motor cable is protruding on the amplifier.
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 39
2 Cooling fan 90 frame
(1) When the two hexagon socket bolts fixing the cooling fan are removed, the cooling fan can be removed from the fan case with the finger guard attached.
(2) Reassemble the cooling fan by
following step (1) in reverse.
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 40
112 frame (1) Remove the hexagon socket bolt
fixing the finger guard. (2) Remove the pan head screw at the
center of the cooling fan. Only the fan will come off.
(3) Cut the four cooling fan lead wires
connected in the terminal box. The fan motor can be removed from the fan case when the pan head screw fixing the fan motor body is removed.
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 41
(4) Reassemble the cooling fan by follow- ing steps (1) to (3) in reverse.
3 Sensor and detection drum
(1) Disconnect the sensor's inner connector from the PCB in the terminal box.
(2) Remove the three hexagon socket
bolts fixing the fan case, and pull the fan case backward. The fan case can be removed with the cooling fan attached.
(3) When the two pan head screws fixing
the sensor installation seat are removed, the installation seat will come off with the sensor attached. Take care not to contact the sensor against the detection drum at this time.
Fan motor
Finger guard
Fan
Fixing screw for installation
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 42
(4) Installing the sensor
Preparation: Clean the sensor block installation surface (motor base) and sensor V-type base side. (Blow with air.) Method: Lightly fix the sensor block with a bolt. (To the degree that the block can be moved.) Tighten the pull-in bolt so that the sensor block is pressed against the installation surface, and the V-type base side contacts the side of the motor base positioning ring. Caution: Make sure that the sensor base does not deviate when the bolt is tightened. Do not apply force on the flexible coupler.
(5) Apply screw lock on the sensor fixing screw and installation seat fixing screw.
(6) Pull the sensor lead wires sufficiently
into the terminal box so that they do not get caught inside when assembl- ing the fan case.
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 43
(7) Removing the drum
Method: Forcibly pull out the drum with a puller jig. Caution: The removed drum cannot be reused.
To remove the detection drum, screw an eye bolt into the screw hole (M8 screw), and by using a puller, turn the puller bolt with a spanner, etc.
(8) Installing the drum
Condition: Warm fitting (Heating temperature: 150°C or less) Method: Confirm that the drum has been warmed to the designated temperature. Wear leather gloves, etc. when holding the drum, and quickly insert it. Caution: The heating device must not have a magnetic field of 50G or more. Do not wear cotton gloves as they are slippery. Confirmation: Confirm that the drum has been completely inserted.
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 44
4 Bearings (1) The counter-load side bracket can be
removed when the shaft box cover fixing screw and bracket fixing hexagon socket bolt are removed.
(2) Apply sealing agent on the engage-
ment surface when assembling the counter-load side bracket.
(3) To remove the counter-load side
bearings, first remove the shaft snap-ring. Then, by using a bearing puller, turn the axis box cover and puller bolt simultaneously with a spanner.
(4) To remove the load side bearings,
catch the claws of the puller onto the inner ring of the bearings and turn the handle.
Shaft snap-ring
Apply sealing agent Bracket fixing bolt
Shaft box cover fixing screw
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor
VI - 45
(5) Before fitting the bearings onto the shaft, wipe the bearing fitting section clean and remove any scratches or protrusions.
(6) Apply oil on the bearing's inner
diameter and shaft engagement surface. Fit the bearing on at a right angle, contact a suitable pipe against the inner ring section, and gradually press in with a press.
(7) If a press is not available, lightly tap
the bearings onto the shaft. Take care not to twist the bearings or contact the pipe against outer ring section.
Attaching the bearings with a press
Press.
Pipe Bearing
Attaching the bearings with a hammer
Pipe Bearing
4. Handling the Orientation Detector
VI - 46
4. Handling the Orientation Detector 4.1 Magnetic sensor type 1-point orientation 4.1.1 Operation of magnet and sensor
The sensor generates two types of voltage according to the positional relation with the magnet as shown in Fig. 6-1.
Rotation direction
Detection head
Magnet
Installation plate
Amplifier
Output voltage
Output voltage
MS signal
LS signal
Across CN6 (6) to (16)
Across CN6 (7) to (17)
+8 to +5V
-5V to 8V+8 to +5V
Fig. 6-1 Sensor output voltage
MS signal ････ 0V is output at the center of the magnet, and the maximum voltage is generated at
both ends of the magnet. If the position shift amount is "0", control is applied so that the operation stops at the position where this voltage is approx. 0V (center position).
The stop position can be changed to approx. ±2.5V by setting the position shift. LS signal ････ The voltage is approximately constant within the magnet area. Use this to confirm that
the operation is stopped without fail within the magnet area.
4. Handling the Orientation Detector
VI - 47
4.1.2 Sequences, etc.
(1) Refer to section 1.3.2 Operation sequence (page VI-2) for details on the operation sequences. (2) Refer to section 2.3 for details on the magnet and detection head installation methods, precautions
for installation and the outline dimensions.
4.2 Encoder type 4096-point orientation 4.2.1 Configuration
Drive unit
Orientation command
Sequence
Sequence
Orientation position command
(12-bit binary)
Encoder Spindle
Motor
M19 M06
NC
CN11
CN10
CN6
CN8 PLG
1:1
4.2.2 Sequences, etc.
(1) Refer to section 1.3.2 Operation sequence (page VI-2) for details on the operation sequences. (2) Refer to section 2.3 for details on the encoder installation methods, handling methods and the
outline dimensions. 4.3 Motor built-in encoder type 4-96-point orientation 4.3.1 Sequences, etc.
(1) Refer to section 1.3.2 Operation sequence (page VI-2) for details on the operation sequences. (2) A detector is incorporated in the motor, so a special detector does not need to be installed.
Appendix 1 Parameter Setting List
A1 - 1
Appendix 1 Parameter Setting List MDS-B/C1-SPT Parameter setting list (1/3) Customer: Machine name: [Setting 1] Drive unit : MDS-B/C1-SPT [Setting 2] Drive unit : MDS-B/C1-SPT Motor : SJ- Motor : SJ- Converter : MDS-B/C1-CV Converter : MDS-B/C1-CV Remarks:
Signal Abbrev. Standard setting Setting Signal Abbrev. Standard
setting Setting Signal Abbrev. Standard setting Setting
SP001 PGM 100 SP049 TLM2 20 SP097 SPECO 0000 SP002 PGE 100 SP050 TLM3 30 SP098 VGOP 63 SP003 0 SP051 TLM4 40 SP099 VGOI 60 SP004 OINP 16 SP052 TLM5 50 SP100 VGOD 15 SP005 OSP 0 SP053 TLM6 60 SP101 DINP 16 SP006 CSP 20 SP054 TLM7 70 SP102 OODR 32767 SP007 OPST 0 SP055 SETM 12 SP103 FTM 200 SP008 0 SP056 PYVR 50 SP104 TLOR 100 SP009 0 SP057 STOD 0 SP105 IQGO 100 SP010 0 SP058 0 SP106 IDGO 100 SP011 0 SP059 MKT 150 SP107 CSP2 0 SP012 0 SP060 MKT2 500 SP108 CSP3 0 SP013 0 SP061 MKIL 75 SP109 CSP4 0 SP014 0 SP062 0 SP110 0 SP015 0 SP063 OLT 60 SP111 0 SP016 0 SP064 OLL 110 SP112 0 SP017 TSP 6000 SP065 VCGN1 100 SP113 0 SP018 ZSP 50 SP066 VCSN1 0 SP114 OPER 0 SP019 CSN1 30 SP067 VIGWA 0 SP115 OSP2 0 SP020 SDTS 600 SP068 VIGWB 0 SP116 0 SP021 TLM1 10 SP069 VIGN 0 SP117 ORUT 0 SP022 VGNP1 63 SP070 FHz 0 SP118 ORCT 0 SP023 VGNI1 60 SP071 VR2WA 0 SP119 MPGH 0 SP024 0 SP072 VR2WB 0 SP120 MPGL 0 SP025 GRA1 1 SP073 VR2GN 0 SP121 MPCSH 0 SP026 GRA2 1 SP074 IGDEC 0 SP122 MPCSL 0 SP027 GRA3 1 SP075 R2KWS 0 SP123 MGDO 542 SP028 GRA4 1 SP076 FONS 0 SP124 MGD1 768 SP029 GRB1 1 SP077 TDSL 14 SP125 MGD2 384 SP030 GRB2 1 SP078 FPWM 0 SP126 0 SP031 GRB3 1 SP079 ILMT 0 SP127 0 SP032 GRB4 1 SP080 ILMA 0 SP128 VRFB 0 SP033 SFNC1 0000 SP081 0 SP129 PFBC 0 SP034 SFNC2 0000 SP082 0 SP130 VGHP1 0 SP035 SFNC3 0000 SP083 0 SP131 VGHI1 0 SP036 SFNC4 0000 SP084 0 SP132 VGHD1 0 SP037 SFNC5 0000 SP085 0 SP133 HPYV1 0 SP038 SFNC6 0000 SP086 0 SP134 VCGH1 0 SP039 ATYP 0000 SP087 DIQM 75 SP135 VCSH1 0 SP040 MTYP 0000 SP088 DIQN 3000 SP136 IQGH1 0 SP041 PTYP 0000 SP089 0 SP137 IDGH1 0 SP042 0 SP090 0 SP138 0 SP043 0 SP091 0 SP139 0 SP044 0 SP092 OFSI 200 SP140 VGHP2 0 SP045 CSNT 0 SP093 0 SP141 VGHI2 0 SP046 CSN2 0 SP094 LMAY 0 SP142 VGHD2 0 SP047 SDTR 30 SP095 VFAV 0 SP143 HPYV2 0 SP048 SUT 15 SP096 EGAR 0 SP144 VCGH2 0
BN U R (1/3)
Appendix 1 Parameter Setting List
A1 - 2
MDS-B/C1-SPT Parameter setting list (2/3)
Signal Abbrev. Standard setting Setting Signal Abbrev. Standard
setting Setting Signal Abbrev. Standard setting Setting
SP145 VCSH2 0 SP200 VGHP7 0 SP255 DA1MPY 0 SP146 IQGH2 0 SP201 VGHI7 0 SP256 DA2MPY 0 SP147 IDGH2 0 SP202 VGHD7 0 SP257 RPM 0000 SP148 0 SP203 HPYV7 0 SP258 NR 0000 SP149 0 SP204 VCGH7 0 SP259 NP 0000 SP150 VGHP3 0 SP205 VCSH7 0 SP260 NB 0000 SP151 VGHI3 0 SP206 IQGH7 0 SP261 NF 0000 SP152 VGHD3 0 SP207 IDGH7 0 SP262 PM 0000 SP153 HPYV3 0 SP208 0 SP263 PLG 0000 SP154 VCGH3 0 SP209 0 SP264 KVP 0000 SP155 VCSH3 0 SP210 0 SP265 KVI 0000 SP156 IQGH3 0 SP211 0 SP266 KVF 0000 SP157 IDGH3 0 SP212 0 SP267 KFP 0000 SP158 0 SP213 0 SP268 KFI 0000 SP159 0 SP214 0 SP269 PYLT 0000 SP160 VGHP4 0 SP215 0 SP270 KDP 0000 SP161 VGHI4 0 SP216 0 SP271 KDI 0000 SP162 VGHD4 0 SP217 0 SP272 KQP 0000 SP163 HPYV4 0 SP218 0 SP273 KQI 0000 SP164 VCGH4 0 SP219 0 SP274 IDSM 0000 SP165 VCSH4 0 SP220 0 SP275 IQSM 0000 SP166 IQGH4 0 SP221 0 SP276 KVDS 0000 SP167 IDGH4 0 SP222 0 SP277 KVQS 0000 SP168 0 SP223 0 SP278 TMLR 0000 SP169 0 SP224 0 SP279 TMLD 0000 SP170 VGHP5 0 SP225 OXKPH 0 SP280 TMLS 0000 SP171 VGHI5 0 SP226 OXKPL 0 SP281 KWS 0000 SP172 VGHD5 0 SP227 OXVKP 0 SP282 KWSR 0000 SP173 HPYV5 0 SP228 OXVKI 0 SP283 IQI 0000 SP174 VCGH5 0 SP229 OXSFT 0 SP284 M0 0000 SP175 VCSH5 0 SP230 0 SP285 M2 0000 SP176 IQGH5 0 SP231 0 SP286 FLUX 0000 SP177 IDGH5 0 SP232 0 SP287 KR2 0000 SP178 0 SP233 0 SP288 LR2 0000 SP179 0 SP234 0 SP289 ICT 0000 SP180 VGHP6 0 SP235 0 SP290 KI1 0000 SP181 VGHI6 0 SP236 0 SP291 TI 0000 SP182 VGHD6 0 SP237 0 SP292 VPWM 0000 SP183 HPYV6 0 SP238 0 SP293 IDLM 0000 SP184 VCGH6 0 SP239 0 SP294 0000 SP185 VCSH6 0 SP240 0 SP295 0000 SP186 IQGH6 0 SP241 0 SP296 0000 SP187 IDGH6 0 SP242 Vavx 0 SP297 0000 SP188 0 SP243 UTTM 0 SP298 0000 SP189 0 SP244 OPLP 0 SP299 0000 SP190 0 SP245 PGHS 0 SP300 0000 SP191 0 SP246 0 SP301 NPM 0000 SP192 FNCO 0 SP247 0 SP302 NICNT 0000 SP193 0 SP248 0 SP303 NICT 0000 SP194 SE2R 0 SP249 SMO 0 SP304 NCSM 0000 SP195 SE2T 0 SP250 LMO 0 SP305 NWR1 0000 SP196 0 SP251 0 SP306 NWR2 0000 SP197 0 SP252 0 SP307 NWR3 0000 SP198 0 SP253 DA1NO 0 SP308 NEV0 0000 SP199 0 SP254 DA2NO 0 SP309 NEV1 0000
BN U R (2/3)
Appendix 1 Parameter Setting List
A1 - 3
MDS-B/C1-SPT Parameter setting list (3/3)
Signal Abbrev. Standard setting Setting Signal Abbrev. Standard
setting Setting Signal Abbrev. Standard setting Setting
SP310 NEV2 0000 SP335 KDIL 0000 SP360 0000 SP311 NEV3 0000 SP336 KQPL 0000 SP361 0000 SP312 R2H 0000 SP337 KQIL 0000 SP362 0000 SP313 EDO 0000 SP338 IDSML 0000 SP363 0000 SP314 SPO 0000 SP339 IQSML 0000 SP364 0000 SP315 SBS 0000 SP340 KVDSL 0000 SP365 0000 SP316 SIQ 0000 SP341 KVQSL 0000 SP366 0000 SP317 DPO 0000 SP342 TMLRL 0000 SP367 0000 SP318 DBS 0000 SP343 TMLDL 0000 SP368 0000 SP319 DIQ 0000 SP344 TMLSL 0000 SP369 0000 SP320 BSD 0000 SP345 KWSL 0000 SP370 0000 SP321 RPML 0000 SP346 KWSRL 0000 SP371 0000 SP322 NRL 0000 SP347 IQIL 0000 SP372 0000 SP323 NPL 0000 SP348 MOL 0000 SP373 0000 SP324 NBL 0000 SP349 M2L 0000 SP374 0000 SP325 NFL 0000 SP350 FLUXL 0000 SP375 0000 SP326 PML 0000 SP351 KR2L 0000 SP376 R2HL 0000 SP327 PLGL 0000 SP352 LR2L 0000 SP377 EDOL 0000 SP328 KVPL 0000 SP353 ICTL 0000 SP378 SPOL 0000 SP329 KVIL 0000 SP354 KIIL 0000 SP379 SBSL 0000 SP330 KVFL 0000 SP355 TIL 0000 SP380 SIQL 0000 SP331 KFPL 0000 SP356 VPWML 0000 SP381 DPOL 0000 SP332 KFIL 0000 SP357 IDLML 0000 SP382 DBSL 0000 SP333 PYLTL 0000 SP358 0000 SP383 DIQL 0000 SP334 KDPL 0000 SP359 0000 SP384 BSDL 0000
Revision
BN U R (3/3)
Appendix 2 Unit Conversion Table
A2 - 1
Appendix 2 Unit Conversion Table The correspondence of the conventional unit symbols used in this manual and the international unit system (SI) is as shown below.
Name of amount Conventional unit's symbol
Unit symbols for SI unit and unit usable in
combination Conversion value
Weight/load (expresses mass) Kg f
Mass
kg
The value is the same
Weight/load (concept of force) Kg f N 1kg f=9.80665N
Force Kg f N 1kg f=9.80665N
Torque Kg f • cm N • m 1kg f • cm=9.80665×10-2N • m
Inertia (J) Kg f • cm • s2 kg • m2 1kg f •cm •s2=9.80665×10-2kg •m2
GD2 GD2 Kg f • cm2
J =
4g
(g: Gravitational acceleration
980cm/s2)
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
A3 - 1
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
1. Outline
The MDS-B-SPT Series large capacity spindle unit (37kW, 45kW, 55kW) is an increased capacity version of the MDS-B-SPT Series standard spindle unit (30kW or less). Thus, the specification items other than those related to the increased capacity are the same as the 30kW or less capacity. The items required for the increased capacity are explained in these specifications. Refer to the "AC Servo/Spindle MDS-A Series/B Series Specifications Manual" (BNP-B3759) for details on the other specifications.
2. List of units
Power supply unit DC power supply/regeneration control to drive unit
Spindle drive unit Spindle motor control
No. Type Capa-city (kW)
Mass (kg)
Outline drawing No. Type
Capa-city (kW)
Mass (kg)
Outline drawing
(1) B-CVE-370 37 9.5 "6.(1)" (1) B-SPT-370 37 20 "6.(4)" (2) B-CVE-450 45 20 "6.(2)" (2) B-SPT-450 45 21 "6.(5)" (3) B-CVE-550 55 21 "6.(3)" (3) B-SPT-550 55 21 "6.(5)"
3. Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB
Always install the following AC reactor and contactor on the input side of each power supply unit (B-CVE-370/450/550). Note that only the contactor can be omitted for the B-CVE-370.
(Note 1) When using the MDS-B-CVE-450 or 550, always install one contactor for one power supply unit. The power supply unit will be damaged if this contactor is omitted or shared.
(Note 2) Always install one ACL for one power supply unit. The power supply unit will be damaged if this ACL is omitted or shared.
Selection of the NFB when using only one power supply unit is shown below as reference.
Power supply unit type B-CVE-370 B-CVE-450 B-CVE-550 Outline drawing
AC reactor (ordered part) B-AL-37K B-AL-45K B-AL-55K "6 (6)" Recommended contactor (non-ordered part) SN150-AC200V SN150-AC200V SN180-AC200V
Recommended NFB (non-ordered part)
NF225CS3P- 175A05
NF225CS3P- 200A05
NF400CS3P- 300A05
(Note) Even when OFF, a leakage current of 15mA or less flows through the coil connection terminal
MC1 for the power supply unit's external contactor. Thus, when using a contactor other than that recommended above, do not use a connector that turns ON at 15mA or less or a contactor that cannot be turned OFF at 15mA. When using a contactor with an internal electronic circuit, consult with the contactor manufacturer and make sure that the contactor will operate correctly even if a leakage current of 15mA or less flows.
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
A3 - 2
4. Outline of units
MD
S-B
-SPT
-550
300
210
120
MD
S-B
-SPT
-450
300
210
120
Spin
dle
driv
e un
it
MD
S-B
-SPT
-370
240
210
115
MD
S-B
-CVE
-550
300
210
120
MD
S-B
-CVE
-450
240
210
115
Pow
er s
uppl
y un
it
MD
S-B
-CVE
-370
150
200
120
340
250
400
380
D2
D1
Spin
dle
driv
e un
it
[Spi
ndle
driv
e un
it]
Out
side
pa
nel
Insi
de p
anel
Mai
nten
ance
ar
ea
(Sid
e)
Fin
+ fa
n
Out
side
pa
nel
Insi
de p
anel
340
250
400
380
D2
D1
Mai
nten
ance
ar
ea
(Sid
e)
Fin
+ fa
n P
ower
su
pply
uni
t
[Pow
er s
uppl
y un
it]
W
(Fro
nt)
Ty
pe
W
D1
D2 Not
e )
The
D1
valu
e in
clud
es th
e te
rmin
al b
lock
cov
er.
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
A3 - 3
5. Panel cut dimension drawing
MD
S-B
-SPT
-550
36
0±0.
3 28
2±1
341±
1 10
±0.5
–
180±
0.3
51±0
.5
(Not
e 1)
Loo
king
from
the
front
of t
he u
nit,
the
spin
dle
driv
e un
it m
ust b
e in
stal
led
to
the
left
of th
e po
wer
sup
ply
unit.
The
pane
l mus
t be
cut t
akin
g th
is in
to
cons
ider
atio
n.
(Not
e 2)
L+
and
L- c
onne
ctio
n co
nduc
tors
are
en
clos
ed w
ith th
e C
VE
-450
and
550
ca
paci
ties,
so
prov
ide
the
dim
ensi
ons
betw
een
the
units
as
show
n be
low
. (N
ote
3) W
hen
usin
g th
e C
VE
-260
to 3
00
capa
citie
s, c
ut th
e pa
nel i
n th
e sa
me
man
ner a
s fo
r the
CV
E-3
70 c
apac
ity.
MD
S-B
-SPT
-450
36
0±0.
3 28
2±1
341±
1 10
±0.5
–
180±
0.3
51±0
.5
Spin
dle
driv
e un
it M
DS-
B-S
PT-3
70
360±
0.3
222±
1 34
1±1
10±0
.5
– 12
0±0.
3 51
±0.5
– –
MD
S-B
-CVE
-550
36
0±0.
3 28
2±1
341±
1 10
±0.5
18
0±0.
3 –
51±0
.5
18±0
.5
120±
0.5
MD
S-B
-CVE
-450
36
0±0.
3 22
2±1
341±
1 10
±0.5
12
0±0.
3 –
51±0
.5
18±0
.5
120±
0.5
Pow
er s
uppl
y un
it M
DS-
B-C
VE-3
70
360±
0.3
142±
1 34
1±1
10±0
.5
60±0
.3
– 41
±0.5
13
±0.5
10
5±0.
5
Pane
l cut
dim
ensi
on d
raw
ing
W2
8-M
5 sc
rew
W5
W1
W3
(Fro
nt)
Spin
dle
driv
e un
it
inst
alla
tion
side
P
ower
sup
ply
unit
in
stal
latio
n si
de
W
W4
H
H1
Squ
are
hole
H2
Squ
are
hole
Ty
pe
H
W
H1
H2
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
A3 - 4
6. Detailed outline drawing
(Note) The I-bolt installation hole is provided only on the top of the MDS-B-CVE-550 and MDS-B-SPT-450/550 models.
The I-bolt (size: M10) is not enclosed, and must be prepared by the user. Use an I-bolt that is between 13mm and 25mm long.
(1) MDS-B-CVE-370
107
10
2-ø6 hole 66
40.6
15
360
380
350
10
15
195
L+ L–
L11 L21 MC1
6 45
6
150 60
70 20 180 120
AIR FLOW
Fin
(2) MDS-B-CVE-450
339
4-ø6 hole
21
360
380
344
10
18
20
L+
L–
L1
60 60 240120
180
63 146 114
L+ L–
AIR FLOW
10
18
L2 L3 L11 L12 MC1
L21 L22 MC2
178.
5
Fin
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
A3 - 5
(3) MDS-B-CVE-550
34
0
4-ø6 hole
20
360
380
344
10
18
20
L+
L–
L1
60 60 300 180
180
63 146 120
L+L–
AIR FLOW
10
18
L2 L3 L11 L12 MC1
L21 L22 MC2
2-M10 screw, for I-bolt installation Only on top
178.
5
64
Fin
(4) MDS-B-SPT-370
339
4-ø6 hole
21
360
380
344
10
18
20
L+
L–
U
60 60 240120
180
62 146 114
AIR FLOW
10
18
V W L11 L21
178.
5
Fin
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
A3 - 6
(5) MDS-B-SPT-450/550
340
4-ø6 hole
20
360
380
344
10
18
20
U
60 60300 180
180
63 146 120
L+
L–
AIR FLOW
10
18
V W L11 L21
2-M10 screw, for I-bolt installation Only on top
178.
5
64
Fin
(6) ACL
DRIVE D
D3±1
1) 37kW, 45kW
(for wire connection) 6-M6 screw
Terminal cover
70±1
MAIN L11L12
L31 L32
L21 L22
215±2.5
75
45
M5 screw FG connection position
(with ground mark) PE connection position
4-8×15 slot(installation hole)
2) 55kW (2
40)
D3
1.5
200±1.5
MAIN L11L12
L31 L32
L21 L22
DRIVE
220±2.5
90
D
6-M10 screw(for wire connection)
Terminal cover
M5 screwFG connection position
PE connection position
4-10×15 slot(installation hole)
(with ground mark)
ACL model
Compatible power supply unit D3 D Mass ACL
model Compatible power
supply unit D3 D Mass
B-AL-37K B-CVE-370 110 150 10.0kg B-AL-55K B-CVE-550 200 320 10.0kg B-AL-45K B-CVE-450 120 160 12.8kg
D
D3±1
(240
) D
3± 1.5
190
D±2
.5
175
145
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
A3 - 7
7. Heating value (1) Power supply unit (2) Spindle drive unit
Model Heating value (W) Model Heating value (W)B-CVE-370 400 B-SPT-370 850 B-CVE-450 500 B-SPT-450 1000 B-CVE-550 600 B-SPT-550 1200
(Note 1) The heating value is the value at the continuous rated output. (Note 2) Use the following expressions as a guide for the heating value outside the panel when
installing in an enclosed structure. Unit Heating value outside panel
B-CVE-370 Heating value outside panel = (B-CVE heating value - 15) × 0.75 B-CVE-450,550 Heating value outside panel = (B-CVE heating value - 30) × 0.75
B-SPT-370,450,550 Heating value outside panel = (B-SPT heating value - 40) × 0.75
8. Selection of power capacity The power capacity required for the power supply unit is shown below.
Power supply unit model Power capacity (kVA) B-CVE-370 54 B-CVE-450 63 B-CVE-550 77
9. Selecting of wire size
(1) Recommended power lead-in wire size Select the wire size based on the power supply unit capacity as shown below regardless of the motor type.
Power supply unit model Recommended power-lead-in wire size
B-CVE-370 HIV50mm2 B-CVE-450 HIV60mm2 B-CVE-550 HIV80mm2
(2) Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire
Select the wire size based on the spindle drive unit capacity as shown below regardless of the motor type.
Spindle drive unit model Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire
B-SPT-370 HIV50mm2 B-SPT-450 HIV60mm2 B-SPT-550 HIV80mm2
(3) L+, L- link bar wire size
Power supply unit model L+, L- link bar wire size B-CVE-370 HIV50mm2 B-CVE-450 Dedicated link bars are enclosed as accessories (always use accessories)B-CVE-550 Dedicated link bars are enclosed as accessories (always use accessories)
(4) L11, L21, MC1
Regardless of the spindle drive unit and power supply unit capacities, use an IV2mm2 or more wire size.
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
A3 - 8
10. Drive unit connection screw size Power supply unit Spindle drive unit
Type B-CVE-370 B-CVE-450 B-CVE-550 B-SPT-370 B-SPT-450 Left side Right side Left side Right side B-SPT-550
L1, L2, L3 M8 M8 M10 - - U, V, W - - - M8 M10 L+, L- M6 M10 M6 M10 M6 M10 M10
L11, L21 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 MC1 M4 M4 M4 - -
11. Connection of Each Unit
(1) Wiring system The wiring system is the same as the standard MDS-A/B-SPT Series (30kW or less). (Refer to the wiring system example below.) Note that there are restrictions on installation and selection, so refer to the Restrictions given in "12".
(a) When using MDS-B-CVE-370 or less
MDS-B-SP(H) –370 to 550
NC
To terminator or battery unit
L+
L11 L21
Contactor
MDS-B-CVE–260 to 370 MDS-B
-Vx
L–
U V W
L+
L– L11
L21
L+
L–L11 L21MC1
L1 L3L2 U V W
MC
B-AL
AC reactorPLG
NFBNFB
For motor blower
Spindle motor ENC
MAG
3ø 200VAC 50Hz3ø 200 to 220VAC 60Hz
Servomotor
CN
7 C
N8
CN
5 C
N6
CN
9
CN
4
CN
1A
CN
1B
CN
2 C
N3
CN
9 C
N4
CN
1AC
N1B
CN
9 C
N4
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
A3 - 9
(b) When using MDS-B-CVE-450 or 550
MDS-B-SP(H)-370 to 550NC
L+
L11L21
MDS-B-CVE-450 to 550 MDS-B-Vx
L–
U V W
Upper step
L11 L21
L+L–
L1 L3L2 U V W
MC1
B-ALPLG
NFB
ENC
MAG
L11L12
MC2 L21L22
Always use the link bar enclosed with B-CVE.
CN
7 C
N8
CN
5 C
N6
CN
9 C
N4
CN
1A
CN
1B
CN
2 C
N3
CN
9 C
N4
CN
1A
CN
1B
CN
9 C
N4
To terminator or battery unit
Contactor
AC reactor
NFBFor motor blower
Spindle motor
3ø 200VAC 50Hz3ø 200 to 220VAC 60Hz
Servomotor
Lower step
(Note 1) Connect the L11, L21 and MC1 external connections without removing the conductors connected between L21 and L22, L22 and MC2, and L11 and L12 of the B-CVE-450/550.
(L12, L22 and MC2 are for special specifications, and normally, the external connection is not required.)
(Note 2) Always connect the contactor to MC1 so that it can be controlled with the drive unit's internal signal. The power supply unit could be damaged if the contactor is turned ON and OFF with a separate user-prepared sequence.
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
A3 - 10
12. Restrictions
(1) Installation Always install the B-SPT-370/450/550 to the left of the B-CVE-260 to 550. When using B-CVE-450/550, always use the enclosed link bar to connect L+ and L- on the B-SPT-370/450/550. (a) Layout when connecting only one spindle drive unit to power supply unit Install the B-CVE-260 to 370/450/550 to the right, and the B-SPT-370/450/550 to the left. Always cut the panel according to the panel cut dimension drawings shown in "5". <Refer to Example 1.> (b) Layout when connecting multiple drive units to a large capacity power supply unit The following number of servo/spindle drive units can be additionally connected.
• When B-CVE-450 and B-SPT-370 are combined, 9kW (=45kW-37kW+1kW) • When B-CVE-550 and B-SPT-450 are combined, 11kW =55kW-45kW+1kW) • When B-CVE-450 and B-SPT-370 are combined, 19kW (=55kW-37kW+1kW)
worth of units' servo/spindle drive unit can be additionally added. In this case, install the B-SPT-370/450 to the left of B-CVE-450/550 as shown in the panel cut dimension drawings in "5". Install the additional drive units to the right of the B-CVE-450/ 550.
If the spindle motor output differs from the spindle drive unit output, the above, excluding the layout, may not always apply. (This is because the power supply unit output is determined by the motor output.)
<Refer to Example 2.>
(2) Selection (a) When using the B-CVE-450/550, one of the B-SPT-370/450/550 units must be selected for
the drive units connected to this power supply unit. Only one B-SPT-370/450/550 can be connected to one B-CVE-450/550. (b) When using B-SPT-370/450/550, the following power supply unit must be selected. • When using B-SPT-370: Select B-CVE-260 or more • When using B-SPT-450: Select B-CVE-300 or more • When using B-SPT-550: Select B-CVE-370 or more Note that if the total of the servo/spindle motor output corresponds to the above power supply
unit with the normal selection method, that capacity power supply unit can be selected.
(Example 3) When using B-SPT-370 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 23kW or less: Select B-CVE-260 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 23.1kW or more:
Select power supply unit selected with normal selection method.
(Example 4) When using B-SPT-450 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 27kW or less: Select B-CVE-300 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 27.1kW or more:
Select power supply unit selected with normal selection method.
(Example 5) When using B-SPT-550 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 31kW or less: Select B-CVE-370 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 31.1kW or more:
Select power supply unit selected with normal selection method.
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
A3 - 11
(Example 1) (Example 2)
SP-450 CVE-450
SP-370 CVE-450 V1-45×2
13. Parameters
The parameters added and changed for the 30kW or less drive unit are as shown below. The parameters other than those shown below are the same as the 30kW or less capacity. Refer to the "AC Servo/Spindle MDS-A Series/B Series Specifications Manual" (BNP-B3759) for details.
No. Abbrev. Details TYP
Select the capacity of the drive unit to be used. Setting
value Drive unit type
000D MDS-B-SPT-370 000E MDS-B-SPT-450 0010 MDS-B-SPT-550
SP039 ATYP
HEX setting
Select the capacity of the power supply unit to be used. Setting
value Power supply unit type
0126 MDS-B-CVE-260 0130 MDS-B-CVE-300 0137 MDS-B-CVE-370 0145 MDS-B-CVE-450 0155 MDS-B-CVE-550
SP041 PTYP
(Note 1) When using the external emergency stop function, add 40 to the above setting value. (Example) When using external emergency stop function with B-CVE-450 0145+0040=0185
HEX setting
14. Precautions
(1) After turning the power OFF, wait at least 15 seconds before turning it ON again. If the power is turned ON within 15 seconds, the drive unit's control power may not start up
correctly.
Revision History
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Dec. 2004 BNP-C3015A First edition created.
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product.
Duplication Prohibited This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
© 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
BNP-C3015A(ENG)
MDS-B-SPT/MDS-C1-SPT Series
008-342
(0412) MEE
Specifications subject to change without notice.Printed in Japan on recycled paper.
MODEL
Manual No.
MODELCODE
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE : MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG., 2-2-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN